JP2021153934A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can fully grasp the game situation from outside of the game machine.SOLUTION: In a game machine of the present invention, when a big winning symbol is stopped and displayed in a variation display, a predetermined signal is output to the outside of the game machine. When a normal losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display, the predetermined signal is not output to the outside of the game machine, but when a specific losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display, the predetermined signal is output to the outside of the game machine.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the starting condition, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming machine that executes the game effect according to the result of the determination. Is common.

Some of such gaming machines output signals according to the gaming situation to the outside of the gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-023716

However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the gaming situation cannot be sufficiently grasped outside the gaming machine.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently grasping a gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a variation in the symbol based on the determination result of the determination means. Specific that the special game is executed in the variable display of the symbol, including the variable display executing means capable of executing the display and the signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine. When the symbol of It is characterized in that when a specific lost symbol in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, the output of a predetermined signal is started.

According to the present invention, it is possible to sufficiently grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is the back side perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for a non-time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table for a time saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table. It is a figure which shows the general control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol variation processing in a main control board. Fuzu is a diagram showing an example of various determination tables used in the Fuden control process. It is a figure which shows the external information data creation processing in a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating various signals output as game information. It is a figure which shows the game ball counting process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance information calculation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a timing chart when a normal time saving state occurs. It is a timing chart when the normal time saving state ends. It is a timing chart from before the start to the end of the first special time saving state. It is a timing chart from before the start to the end of the second special time saving state. It is a figure which shows the main processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt process of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect determination process of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice type determination table. It is a figure which shows the effect mode update process of an effect control unit. This is an example of an effect when a normal time saving state occurs. This is an example of production when the normal time saving state ends. This is an example of production when the first special time saving state occurs. This is an example of production when the second special time saving state occurs. This is an example of production when the special time saving state ends. This is a modified example when the second special time saving state occurs.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which a game ball (game medium) flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95, which will be described later, pay out based on the establishment of the granting conditions. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as a game ball, and a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into an overflowing ball flow path, which will be described later, without being able to fit in the upper plate 11. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become like. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality in which the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 95 occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. It is installed side by side.

The effect button device 16 has an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. A button drive motor 17b provided with a button drive motor for changing to a protruding state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 into a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode, and The effect button light emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 into a light-off state and a lighting state that emits light in a predetermined mode is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 3) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) juxtaposed with the game machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 3) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the fullness detection switch 32a detects the fullness of the lower plate 12. During this period, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the player's hand are touching the launch handle 15. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 3) including a 15a (see FIG. 3) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 3) for firing the game ball toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board mounting frame 3. A lock mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in the closed state and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 3) for driving the launching member, and launching from the launching member toward the lower left portion of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 3) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyway of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is opened. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and the game area 5a is launched by the first firing force by the decorative frame 40. It is divided into a left game area where the game ball is flowing down and a right game area where the game ball launched by the second firing force stronger than the first firing force is flowing down. Is adapted to communicate below the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced in the above can be rolled and flowed down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, the game One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the game balls that have won (winned) in the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 3) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, a first starting port 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball is provided, and the first starting port 45 wins (wins). When the game ball (ball) is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 3) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are dispensed by the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Is to be paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to perform a special game determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally below the right of the first starting port 45, it is impossible to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning in the collision detection described later). A variable starting portion 46 is provided that can convert from a difficult closed state to a winning state of a game ball or an easy open state.

The variable starting portion 46 has a second starting port opening / closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second starting port opening / closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction as well as a flow path for the game ball by inclining the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1). The second starting port 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward just below the starting opening opening / closing member 48, and the second game ball that wins (wins) the second starting port 47 are detected. By moving the start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 3) and the second start port opening / closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second start port 47 is converted to the closed state, and the second start port is changed to the closed state. A second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 3) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 into an open state by moving the opening / closing member 48 toward the rear (winning allowable position).

Then, a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 47 which is opened during the auxiliary game described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 3) (granting condition is satisfied). Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving prize value). In addition, the right to determine whether or not to execute the special game (here, the jackpot game) is granted (the special figure determination information described later is stored).

In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a normal figure gate 44 (normal figure starting area) through which the game ball can always pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through the normal figure gate 44 is the gate detection switch 44a. If it is detected in, the prize ball is not given, but the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (hit judgment) as to whether or not to execute the hit game is given (the general figure judgment information described later is stored).

Below the Fuzu Gate 44, it is possible or easy to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (it was determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment). A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by inclining the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and the first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward just below the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51. By moving the first large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the first large winning opening 50 and the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (winning restriction position). To convert the first large winning opening 50 to the closed state and to convert the first large winning opening 50 to the open state by moving the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the rear (permissible winning position). The first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 3) is provided.

Then, when the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game, the game ball or the first big winning opening 50 that has flowed down the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 is reached. The game ball that has been played wins the first prize opening 50. Then, when the winning game balls are detected by the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are ejected from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls on the upper plate 11. Will be paid out to.

Below the first variable winning section 49, it is possible or easy to win a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined as a big hit by the big hit judgment). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) becomes a flow path for the game ball by inclining the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) (forms a part of the bottom surface of the flow path). ), The second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction, the second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward just below the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57, and the second. The second large winning opening detection switch 56a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the large winning opening 56 and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are moved toward the front (winning restriction position). A second for converting the second large winning opening 56 to the open state by converting the large winning opening 56 to the closed state and moving the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 toward the rear (permissible winning position). A large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 3) is provided.

Then, when the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game, it reaches the game ball or the second big winning opening 56 that has flowed down the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57. The game ball that has been played wins the second prize opening 56. Then, when the winning game balls are detected by the second large winning opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, eight) are ejected from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) as prize balls on the upper plate 11. Will be paid out to.

The game ball launched into the left game area flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 as it is, or flows down through the stage portion 42 after flowing into the warp device 41 and is provided below the decorative frame 40. A prize is won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or the game flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50) and the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right game area are won ( There is no passing).

Further, the game ball launched into the right game area flows down by passing through the normal gate 44 via the upstream flow path 91a, and is provided in the right game area with one general winning opening 43 and a variable starting unit. Either 46 (2nd start opening 47), 1st variable winning section 49 (1st big winning opening 50), 2nd variable winning section 55 (2nd big winning opening 56), or out opening 39 It will flow in. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area will not be won.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56, and an out opening 39. An out-ball flow path is provided which receives the out-balls composed of the inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down while collecting them, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game balls that flow down the out-ball flow path and are detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold are held. A hold display device including a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a main information display 59 including a status confirmation display 68 are provided. The main information display 59 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

The jackpot judgment is the special figure judgment information (big hit judgment random value, special symbol judgment random value, reach judgment random) when the game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 45 or the second start port 47. It corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern, etc.) and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol display 60 performs a variable display of the first special symbol, and the determination result is notified after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Further, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol display 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and the determination result is notified after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of six LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LEDs changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) in the variable display of each special symbol. do. When focusing on only one LED, it blinks at a cycle of 256 ms (32 ms on → 224 ms off). Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode a predetermined number of times (with an interval). For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a prize ball by a player who performs the game four times, ten times, or the like.

The maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) are won (winned) in the large winning opening, one round game is completed. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player can be executed.

Auxiliary game judgment is the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44. Is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired general map determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) of notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 is used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (winning), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first hold (U1), and lights or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second hold (U2), and lights or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold. The maximum number of the second hold may be four, but the number may be less than four or more, or the second hold may not be stored.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal figure determination information (normal figure hold) stored when a game ball wins (passes) at the normal figure gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that although the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, the number of hold of the normal figure may be less than or more than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, if it is judged as a big hit by the big hit judgment, the numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and if it is judged that the time is shortened, the numbers such as "0" are stopped and displayed and lost. If it is determined that, "-" should be stopped and displayed, and during the variable display, the lights should be turned off and "-" should be repeated.

The round number display 66 is composed of 6 LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and the LEDs are in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, in the case of a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and in the case of a jackpot game with 16 rounds, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right game area (so-called right-handed) during a jackpot state (special game) or a time-saving game state. It is for displaying, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The lighting of the LED is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. Since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine in this way, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. .. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed at any position on the front (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is recognized which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, in the setting change mode, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be lit and displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be blinked and vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 68 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and the number of round indicators Since 66, the right-handed display 67 and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these displays may be turned on.

Inside the game area 5a, there are a sub-first variation indicator 81, a sub-second variation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-general map variation indicator 85, and a sub-general. Figure A sub information display 80 including a hold display 86 and a sub right-handed display 87 is provided. The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit. The sub-information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display 80 is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the state confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display, and the sub second variable display 82 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is changing. It is for displaying (notifying) whether or not it is inside, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (lights up for 0.5 seconds → turns off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. do.

The sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be used to notify the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this case, it is advisable to turn on the LED in the case of a big hit and turn off the LED in the case of a loss.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information (first hold number) described later, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information described later (the number of second hold information described later). It is for displaying the second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left turns on and the LED on the right turns off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs are lit, and when the number of holds is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED is lit, and when the number of holds is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (the number of normal figure hold), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved figures is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for urging the game ball to be fired (so-called right-handed) toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED is turned on during the jackpot state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED is turned off in other game states.

A main display device 70 (first image display device) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is the lower part of the effect space 40a and is the main display device. In front of the 70, a sub display device 71 (second image display device) composed of a liquid crystal display having a size and a display area smaller than that of the main display device 70 is provided, and an operation is performed in the upper part of the effect space 40a. A movable effect device 73 for executing the effect is provided.

The main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demonstration effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not executed, a variation effect accompanied by the effect symbol 70a variation display performed during the execution of the special symbol variation display, and a variation of the special symbol. There is a variable display of the special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) performed during the execution of the display, a jackpot effect performed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the like.

Further, the sub display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving the sub display device 71 by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like during execution of the variation effect on the main display device 70. ..

Specifically, it moves (ascends) in the vertical direction between the standby position (lower position) located near the end of the main display device 70 and the effect position (upper position) located near the center of the main display device 70. , Down) to create a moving effect. In addition, it may be swung up and down at the standby position (lower position) and the effect position (upper position), or may be swung up and down at an intermediate position between the standby position and the effect position. .. Further, the moving direction of the sub display device 71 (second image display device) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the main display device 70 (first image display device), there is a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a variable display area for the variable effect. A mode display area or the like indicating the current effect mode related to execution is formed.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The effect symbol 70a is designed to stop and display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, time saving mode, loss mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the time saving mode is a special symbol (big hit mode and loss mode) such as "-○-". It is a combination in which (a symbol not included in) is located, and the lost mode is another mode.

The variable display mode of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or it may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. good.

Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 according to the result of the jackpot determination. This raises the player's expectation that the jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The main display device 70 includes a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in the normal gaming state described later, and a first hold icon display area 70B described later. The second hold icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state, and the fact that the variation effect is being executed. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) to be shown, the first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and the second hold number (U2) are numerical values. A second reserved number display area 70F or the like for display is formed.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. 1 Display units 70B1 to 4th display units 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 first displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the second display unit 70B2 displays the second. The first hold icon indicating the first hold memory for which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70B3 is the third display for which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. The first hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the left side in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth. On the display unit 70D4, a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2) is displayed.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 first displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second. The second hold icon indicating the second hold memory is displayed on the third display unit 70D3, and the second special symbol variation display is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon indicating the hold memory is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and rides on or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as shown.

Specifically, the first hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a). By moving (shifting) and moving (shifting) the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 to the icon display area 70C, the icon becomes the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed. The icon disappears (erases) at the end of. In other words, the disappearance effect (erasure effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts) one by one toward the icon display area 70C with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). ), The second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C to become the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed on the main display device 70, but the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed on either or both of the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71. May be done.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a and the second movable member 73a are in the process of executing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the main display device 70. By causing the movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute the operation effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a has a standby position (first position) located near the end (upper side) of the main display device 70 (first image display device) and a center side of the main display device 70 (first position). It is designed to move (rise, fall) to and from the effect position (second position) located (lower). The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position that recedes from the front of the first movable member 73a. ..

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game supplied from a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit 96 that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A having a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120, and an effect control board 130 are built-in. An effect control device 130A, a power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer), and the like are provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided so that the left and right other sides open and close in the left and right directions around a rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, display devices (main display device, sub display device), and various lighting devices (frame lighting devices). 10. A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the amount of light of the panel lighting device 74) is provided.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110. The board 120, the effect control board 130 that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130. It has 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the effect control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be sent to the board 130 in only one direction.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 110c serving as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like. It has 110m.

Out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start port detection switch 45a, second start port detection switch 47a, second start port opening / closing are provided in the input / output ports of the main control unit 110m. Solenoid 48b, 1st prize opening detection switch 50a, 1st prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, 2nd prize opening detection switch 56a, 2nd prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, main The information display 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, the payout control board 120, and the effect control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. The stored game data area and the second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The game RWM area changes depending on the setting value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for determining an abnormality in the RWM area, and the progress of the game. A game data area for storing game data (variation number of times described later, various time saving state flags, high probability game flag, various time saving times, etc.) is provided.

The information RWM area is provided with a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. The relationship will be explained.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. In addition, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

To the input / output port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95, and a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored is connected to the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like are performed. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input / output port, and the like, and the ball feed solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, the launch solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output port. ..

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch solenoid has a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. 28b is driven to launch a game ball (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control board 130 displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 m that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command 130 m from the effect control unit 130 m. A display control unit 140 that controls audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of effect control commands from the effect control unit 130 m. It has.

The effect control unit 130 m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port. , The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) Control processing, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc. are performed.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the main display device 70 (first image display device) and the sub display device 71 (second image display device) to display a predetermined image. Alternatively, the sound output device 9 is controlled to output a predetermined sound or sound.

The display control unit 140 is a control unit 141 that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130 m, and a display control command (display list) from the control control unit 141. Image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the main display device 70 (first image display device) and sub display device 71 (second image display device) based on reception, CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and integrated control. It includes a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) that controls the voice output device 9 based on the reception of a voice control command from the unit 141, and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored.

The integrated control unit 141 includes a centralized CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 141b that stores an integrated control program, an integrated RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 (VDP) and a voice control unit 148 (voice). It has an input / output port to which the LSI) is connected.

The integrated CPU 141a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device) and the sub display device 71 (second image display device) is generated and displayed on the display control unit 140. Control processing for transmission, control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing a production sound to be output from the voice output device 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI), and the like are performed.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include a frame lighting device 10, a button drive device 17b (button drive motor, button vibration motor), an effect button light emitting LED 17c, a movable effect device 73, a panel lighting device 74, and a sub-information display. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, sub 1st hold indicator 83, sub 2nd hold indicator 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 , Sub right-handed display 87) is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (power failure has occurred), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (power failure). It includes a disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is disconnected (power failure).

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 to obtain a voltage drop detection signal. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than the predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage (power outage) after the recovery from the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130 m, the payout control board 120 and the sub-RAM 130c are retained so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). A backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control unit 130 m. Further, the backup power supply may be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the effect control unit 130 m.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special game determination (big hit determination) has a "low probability state" and a "high probability state", and the state relating to the second starting port opening / closing member 48 of the second starting port 47 is "non-time saving". It has a "state" and a "time saving state".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is a low probability state and a non-time saving state, which is a "low probability non-time saving game state (a normal game in which it is advantageous for the player to perform a left-handed hit in which a game ball is launched in the left area of the game area 5a". State) ”, low probability state and time saving state“ low probability time saving game state (time saving game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball in the right area of the game area 5a) ”, high A "high-probability time-saving game state (probability-changing game state in which it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball in the right region of the game area 5a)" is provided, which is a probability state and a time-saving state.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal gaming state". In addition, even during the jackpot game, the "low probability non-time saving game state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (of the jackpot probability) at the stage of the advantage of the game is "1", the game is played in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. In the special game judgment (big hit judgment) performed on the condition that the ball has entered, the game state in which the jackpot probability is set as low as about 1/300.

On the other hand, in the "high probability state", when the set value is "1", the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/60, which is more advantageous to the player than in the low probability state. The state. The transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, the "non-time saving state" means that the winning probability is set to 255/256 in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, and the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set. Refers to a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 0.3 seconds or 0.6 seconds when is set to about 70 seconds and is a hit.

On the other hand, in the "time saving state", the winning probability is set to 255/256, the average time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and the second start when the winning is won. By setting the opening time of the mouth 47 to 2 seconds or 5 seconds, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in which the consumption of the gaming ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving state. In the present embodiment, a normal time saving state controlled based on the end of the jackpot game, a first special time saving state controlled based on the winning of a special loss (time saving) in the jackpot determination, and a special symbol executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition. A second special time saving state is set, which is controlled based on the number of executions of the variable display of.

The average fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the second starting port 47 are set to be more advantageous in the "time reduction state" than in the "non-time reduction state". Only one of the opening times of the second starting port 47 may be set to be advantageous.

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 4A is a special diagram in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 and / or the second starting port 47 is stored. It is a figure which shows the determination information storage area, FIG. 4 (b) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. It is a normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired when passing through is stored, and FIG. 4D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal map determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. It is divided into a special figure determination information storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively.

The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display unit 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. It corresponds to the unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4, respectively. Further, the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display unit 70D1 and the second display unit 70D2 of the second reservation icon display area 70D. Corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and these special figure determination information can be used. The corresponding number of first hold icons will be displayed on the first display units 70B1 to the fourth display units 70B4 of the first hold icon display area 70C. Further, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information is the second reserved number (U2), and the number corresponding to these determination information. The hold icon is displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 4B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random number value. The area is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored most in the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the number of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is the smallest in which the special figure determination information is not stored. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

When the start condition of the variation display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The determination information is shifted and will be referred to for executing the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 4C, the normal map determination information storage area varies from the normal map determination information storage area in which the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44 is stored. It is divided into a normal map determination information storage area in which display is being executed, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. The number of normal map determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal map determination information reservation storage area is the number of normal map reservations.

As shown in FIG. 4D, each storage unit has a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value and a normal symbol determination random number storage for storing a normal symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for determining a normal map variation pattern for storing a random number value for determining a normal map variation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the Fuzu gate 44 and the Fuzu determination information is acquired, it is acquired in the storage unit having the smallest number in which the Fuzu determination information is not stored in the Fuzu determination information reserved storage area. The normal map judgment information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal figure judgment information execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal figure judgment information stored in the first storage unit of the normal figure judgment information hold storage area shifts. And will usually be referenced to perform variable display of symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, a process for preparing to start control of the game, a process for initially operating various drive sources of the board unit 500, and the like are performed. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is moved to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, a momentary power failure is possible in which the voltage of the power supply drops for a moment. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is moved to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is moved to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt, which will be described later, and a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality of the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (power recovery) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to start up so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching device 26 to launch the game ball.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S18 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is moved to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is moved to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) at the stage of the advantage of the game is changed (updated), and the set value is changed by the operation of the setting key switch 112a. Perform the process of confirming. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the range is appropriate, the process is transferred to step S23, and if it is determined that the range is not appropriate, the process is transferred to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying the error information "E" indicating the unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting the unrecoverable error designation command indicating that the unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibit timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for executing the non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation, the setting is not canceled. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. During an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" displays an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to let the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Or, the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the sound output device 9 indicates that a recovery error has occurred. It is to output an error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" is to display an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or to display a frame. It indicates that the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the sound output device 9. The power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the main display device 70 (first image display device) and the sub display device 71 (second image display device) do not display the initial screen, but the main display device 70 and the sub display device 71 display the initial screen. A display may be provided to notify that the RWM area has been cleared.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S28 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S28.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process for displaying the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and ending the confirmation of the set value by operating the setting key switch 112a. I do.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to a process for executing the power restoration notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

The "power recovery notification" is to display the power recovery screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or to display a frame in order to make the main display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. That the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and that the power is restored from the sound output device 9 (from a power failure). The indicated power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) is output over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations, and the main display device 70 is processed to display the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of the board 110) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start of the game progress control, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, the non-recoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is set. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area, and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent, the current game state is sent. The game state specification command indicating the above may be transmitted.

Further, in the RWM clear process, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol related to the occurrence of the second special time saving state, which will be described later, is also cleared to 0, but it is executed based on the setting change operation or the RWM clear operation. In the RWM clearing process, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol related to the occurrence of the second special time saving state may not be cleared to 0 (in the RWM clearing process executed based on the checksum being not normal, the first 2 Clear 0 times the number of fluctuations of the special symbol related to the occurrence of the special time saving state). In this case, a dedicated clearing operation means (for example, an operation switch on the main control board 110 or the like) for clearing 0 the number of times of variation display of the special symbol related to the occurrence of the second special time saving state is provided, for example. Based on the fact that the clearing operation means is operated when the power is turned on, the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol related to the occurrence of the second special time saving state may be cleared to 0.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt process, after the initial setting process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds). It is executed by the fact that it controls the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area in step S100, and performs the time control process (game program) in step S110. Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as a stop time of a special symbol and an opening time of a special electric accessory.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process (game program). Specifically, the update of the jackpot judgment random value, the special symbol judgment random value, the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, the hit judgment random value, the normal symbol judgment random value, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment random value. I do. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new lap initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process (game program). Specifically, in the same manner as in step S30, the process of updating the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an input control process (game program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first winning opening detection switch 50a, the second winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process (game program). Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the large winning opening. Processing such as opening / closing (first prize opening 50, second prize opening 56) and setting the game state is performed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the Fuzu-fuden control process (game program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the acquired normal map determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44, variation display of the normal symbol, opening / closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game), and the like is performed. The details of the Fuzu Fuden control process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, referring to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second) A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the large winning opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes the process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (game program). Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning in the second starting port 47 when the auxiliary game is not in progress, or a game ball winning in the big winning opening when the jackpot game is not in progress, various winnings An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls won in the mouth and the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning ball to flow down do not match, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period, a door opening error that causes the opening detection switch 31a to change from the OFF state to the ON state, and the RWM clear switch 111a while the progress control of the game is being performed. It is determined whether or not an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated and a full error in which the lower plate 12 is detected by the full detection switch 32a) has occurred, and an error specification command corresponding to the generated error is issued. A process for transmitting to the effect control board 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs a data creation process (game program) in step S700. Specifically, a process of creating data such as ON / OFF data to be output to various solenoids and display data to be output to various indicators of the main information display 59 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the external information data creation process in step S720. Specifically, a process of creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. The details of the external information data creation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (game program) in step S750. Specifically, processing for outputting signals such as ON / OFF data and display data created in step S700 and game information data created in step S720, and various commands to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. Performs processing to send.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during the normal gaming state, the number of payouts during the normal game, and the outs during the normal gaming state. A process is performed to count the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the game state. The details of the game ball counting process will be described later.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which can be useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a normally performs a base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, the normal base value ((number of normal payouts ÷ number of normal middle outs) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is set. The normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of. The details of the normal base value calculation process will be described later.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs the performance display data setting process (information program) in step S850. Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs the game program return processing. Specifically, the process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode) before the game progress control is started, so that the payout is made. Since the number and the number of outs are not counted, the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the general winning opening detection switch input process in step S210. Specifically, for determining whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and paying out the winning ball from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, has the detection signal been input from the first prize opening detection switch 50a or the second prize opening detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball has won the first prize opening 50 or the second prize opening 56. It is determined whether or not the prize ball has been paid out, and a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the first start port detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing the processing for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the second start port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal map gate 44, and acquiring and storing the normal map determination information. I do. When this process is completed, the current input control process is completed.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process shifts to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the three prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first hold number (U1) is less than 4. If the first hold number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and if the first hold number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch input process this time is performed. To finish.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the first hold number (U1) is set. The corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S230-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving state (normal gaming state) is in progress. If it is in the non-time saving state, the process is transferred to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time saving state, the first pre-judgment process described later is not executed (the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted). This time, the first start port detection switch input process is completed.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-judgment process, the special figure judgment information acquired this time is pre-judged using the pre-judgment table for the non-time saving state (see FIG. 19A) before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. , A first look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is generated. The details of the pre-judgment table for the non-time saving state will be described later.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command generated in step S230-9 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the jackpot game is executed over one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first look-ahead designation command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that is expected to be performed. It should be noted that this process is terminated, and the first start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

(Second start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input, the process shifts to step S240-2, and when the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is not input, the present second 2 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating one prize ball to the one prize ball counter used for one prize ball, and in step S240-3, determining a special figure. Information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for special symbol judgment, random value for reach judgment, random value for judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern) is acquired.

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second hold number (U2) is less than 4. If the second hold number (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-5, and if the second hold number (U2) is not less than 4, the second start port detection switch input process this time is performed. To finish.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second hold number (U2) and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1), and in step S240-6, the second hold number (U2) is set. The corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2) is displayed on the main display device 70.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and the vacant storage units are acquired in step S240-3. The figure judgment information is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time saving state (time saving game state, probability variation game state) is in progress. If the time is shortened, the process is transferred to step S240-9, and if the time is not shortened, the second pre-judgment process described later is not executed, and the second start port detection switch input process is performed this time. finish.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) or less. If the number of remaining time reductions is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the process is moved to step S240-10, and if the number of remaining time reductions is not less than or equal to the predetermined number, the second pre-judgment process described later is executed (second look-ahead designation). Assuming that the command is not transmitted), the second start port detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs the second pre-determination process in step S240-10. In this second pre-judgment process, the special figure judgment information acquired this time is pre-judged using the pre-judgment table for the time saving state (see FIG. 19B) before the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. A second look-ahead designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is generated. The details of the pre-judgment table for the time saving state will be described later.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second look-ahead designation command generated in step S240-10 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the jackpot game is executed over one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead designation command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that is expected to be performed. When this process is completed, the second start port detection switch input process this time is completed.

In the present embodiment, in the first pre-judgment process and the second pre-judgment process described above, the special figure judgment information (big hit judgment random value, special symbol judgment random value, reach judgment random value, special figure fluctuation pattern) Since it is a process for pre-determining (judgment random value), it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol related to the occurrence of the second special time saving state, which will be described later, has reached the specified number of times. There is no such thing. Therefore, the look-ahead effect regarding whether or not the second special time saving state occurs is not executed either.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit of the second hold may be smaller than the upper limit of the first hold.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. , The special figure special electric control process of this time is finished.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the hold storage (special figure determination information) and the special figure special electric processing data are changed to "1". The special symbol memory determination process (step S310) for performing the process or the like is executed. The details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation time elapses, the stop time of the special symbol is set, and the processing or special symbol for transmitting the special symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 130 is performed. A special symbol variation process (step S320) for performing a process of changing the special electric processing data to "2" or the like is executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 2, the special figure special electric processing data is changed to "0" if it is a lost special symbol (normal lost special symbol, special lost special symbol) according to the passage of the stop time of the special symbol, and a big hit. If it is a special symbol, the special symbol stop process (step S330) for setting the opening time of the jackpot game and performing the process of changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" is executed. The details of the special symbol stop processing will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the big hit game processing for executing the big hit game or changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4" based on the end of the final round game ( Step S340) is executed. The details of the jackpot game end process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the big hit game end processing for performing the processing for ending the big hit game, the processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the big hit game, etc. (Step S350) is executed.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process is moved to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts the second hold number (U2) by "1" and updates it, and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second hold number (U2) after the subtraction is performed. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, in the second special figure determination information storage area. The stored data is shifted, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the 0th storage unit.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S310-5, and if the first hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is moved to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates by subtracting the first hold number (U1) by "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first hold number (U1) after the subtraction. Is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the process for updating the display of the icon are performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol hold storage area. The shift processing of the generated data is performed, and the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the 0th storage unit.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol hold display data indicating the first hold number (U1) and the second hold number (U2) after subtraction is displayed in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 are updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the second hold is subtracted in preference to the number of the first hold, but the number of the first hold and the number of the second hold are subtracted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port. Alternatively, the number of first hold may be subtracted in preference to the number of second hold.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit and the stop special figure data of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot judgment process. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variation effect is performed.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage area, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316, the variation display of the special symbol. To start.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the customer waiting state is set. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the special symbol memory determination process this time is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. The customer waiting state means a state in which the special symbol variation display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is in the customer waiting state is used to produce the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the special symbol storage determination process this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for executing the customer waiting demo effect for encouraging the player to play the game is performed.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the set value stored in the set value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, the jackpot according to the type of the special symbol related to the special figure determination information determined this time. The jackpot determination is performed using the determination table (see FIG. 14). The details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot winning. If the jackpot is not won, the process is moved to step S311-5, and if the jackpot is won, the special symbol determination table for jackpot (see FIG. 15A) is selected in step S311-4, and the step The process is transferred to S311-8.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a special loss (time saving) winning. If the special loss (time reduction) is not won, the process is moved to step S311-7, and if the special loss (time reduction) is won, the special symbol determination table for the special loss (time reduction) is set in step S311-6. (See FIG. 15B) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table (see FIG. 15C) for normal loss, assuming that the result of the jackpot determination is normal loss, and shifts the process to step S311-8. ..

The main CPU 110a is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 using the special symbol determination table selected in step S311-8. The symbol is determined, and in step S311-10, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the current jackpot determination process is completed.

In this way, regardless of the current gaming state (whether or not it is in the time saving state, whether or not it is in the high probability state), if the special loss (time saving) is won, it is for the special loss (time saving). The special symbol of special loss is determined from the special symbol judgment table of. Therefore, even during the probabilistic game state (high probability state) in which the first special time saving state is not generated, the result of the jackpot determination can be appropriately notified to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 14A shows a jackpot determination for the first special symbol, which is referred to when determining the special figure determination information (big hit determination) acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. FIG. 14 (b) is a table, and FIG. 14 (b) is a second special symbol referred to when determining (big hit determination) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. It is a jackpot judgment table for.

As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the jackpot determination table contains the current set value, the game state when the jackpot determination is performed, the random value for jackpot determination, and the determination result of the jackpot determination. (Big hit, special loss (shorter time), normal loss) is associated, and the approximate winning probability is listed in the rightmost column for reference.

"Big hit" is a judgment result that a big hit game will be executed, and "special loss (time reduction)" is a judgment result that a big hit game is not executed but a first special time reduction state will occur. Yes, "normal loss" is a determination result in which the jackpot game is not executed and the first special time saving state does not occur.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 14A, when the set value is "1" and the game is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, it is referred to as "100" to "299". 200 jackpot judgment random numbers are judged as "big hits", 100 jackpot judgment random values from "2000" to "2099" are judged as "special loss (time reduction)", and other jackpot judgment random values. It will be determined that the numerical value is "normal loss".

The first feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 14 is that the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol wins a special loss (time reduction), while the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol wins. , There is a point that you do not win the special loss (short time). By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability different when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

The second feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 14 is that the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the special loss (time reduction) probability does not change and is constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The third feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 14 is that the special loss (time reduction) probability is lower than the jackpot probability and the normal loss probability in the normal game state of the minimum set value "1". There are some points. By doing so, it is possible to increase the rarity of the special loss (time reduction) that causes the first special time reduction state, and to prevent the amusement store side from suffering an extreme disadvantage.

The fourth feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 14 is that the special loss (time reduction) is won in the non-time reduction state (normal game state), while the time reduction state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state). One point is that you will not win the special loss (shorter working hours). By doing this, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player does not have an excessive advantage and the gambling becomes excessively high by winning the special loss (time reduction) again during the time saving state. Become.

It should be noted that the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the jackpot probability is higher). It may be.

Further, all the set values (1 to 4) may have the same probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state, and for example, two or three set values (2 or 3 setting values) may be set. In 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same.

Further, in the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, a special loss (time reduction) is won in the time-saving game state and the probability-changing game state, but the special loss is won in one or both of the time-saving game state and the probability-changing game state. You may not win (shorter time).

In addition, in the jackpot judgment table for the second special symbol, the special loss (time reduction) is not won, but the special loss (time reduction) is achieved in at least one or all of the normal game state, the time reduction game state, and the probability variation game state. ) May be won. In this case, the jackpot judgment table for the first special symbol may be won with the same probability, or a different probability (the jackpot judgment table for the first special symbol has a higher probability, or the second special symbol). The jackpot judgment table for symbols may be won with a higher probability).

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed in a manner more disadvantageous to the player than the big hit game is not won, but the small hit is won. You may try to do it. Further, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol may not win the small hit, while the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol may win the small hit. In these cases, the probability of being determined as a small hit may be the same for all the set values.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 15 (a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 15 (b) shows a special loss (time reduction). It is a special symbol determination table for special loss that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined, and FIG. 15 (c) determines the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be lost. It is a special symbol judgment table for normal loss that is referred to when performing.

As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, in the special symbol determination table, the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random value for the special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination thereof. The stop special symbol data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other, and the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols in which the first jackpot game (normal jackpot game) consisting of 10 round games is executed, and a few from the left end of the special symbol display, It is displayed by turning on the fourth three LEDs.
The special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot special symbols in which the second jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game) consisting of 10 round games is executed, and 3, 4, from the left end of the special symbol display, It is displayed by turning on the fifth three LEDs.
The special symbol "03" is a jackpot special symbol in which the third jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game) consisting of two round games is executed, and is the fourth, fifth, and sixth three from the left end of the special symbol display. It is displayed by turning on the LEDs.

The special symbols "20" and "21" are special lost special symbols that generate the first special time saving state, and the two LEDs 1st, 5th, 1st, and 6th from the left end of the special symbol display are It is displayed by turning it on.
The special symbols "00" and "10" are normal loss special symbols that do not cause a jackpot game and a time saving state, and the first LED from the left end of the special symbol display lights up. It is supposed to be displayed.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that the type of jackpot special symbol, the type of special loss special symbol, and the type of normal loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. .. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that the selection ratio of the jackpot special symbol, the selection ratio of the special loss special symbol, and the selection ratio of the normal loss special symbol do not change depending on the set value and are constant. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the jackpot special symbol is more than the number of special loss special symbols and normal loss special symbols. The number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that when displaying a normal lost special symbol rather than the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the special lost special symbol. The point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the type of the displayed special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 15 is that the LED (light emitting member) of the special symbol display that lights when displaying the special lost special symbol normally lights when displaying the lost special symbol. It can be mentioned that the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display is included. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that it is not a jackpot special symbol but a special loss special symbol or a normal loss special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although one normal loss special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You may.

Further, although two types of special lost symbols are associated with the first special symbol, one type may be used, or three or more types may be used.

Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the jackpot special symbol may be larger or smaller than three. Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the special loss special symbol may be larger or smaller than two, but even in this case, the jackpot special symbol may be used. The number of LEDs of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying may be different from the number of LEDs.

Also, the same LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the special lost special symbol and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the normal lost special symbol are not included (completely). The LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying one of the two types of special lost special symbols and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the normal lost special symbol The LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the other of the two types of special loss special symbols and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the normal loss special symbol May not include the same thing (make it completely different).

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current non-time saving state (normal game state) is present. If it is not in the non-time saving state, the process is transferred to step S313-3, and if it is in the non-time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 17) for the non-time saving state is selected in step S313-2. Then, the process is transferred to step S313-8. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is before the final fluctuation of the time saving state (normal time saving state, first special time saving state, second special time saving state) (time saving number> 0). If it is not before the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, that is, if it is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state (number of time-saving times = 0), the process is moved to step S313-5, and if it is before the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, the step In S313-4, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18A) for the time saving state (before the final fluctuation) is selected, and the process is transferred to step S313-8. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state (before the final fluctuation) will be described later.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is shortened. In the case of the normal time saving state, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18B) for the normal time saving state (final fluctuation) is selected, and the process is transferred to step S313-8. In the case of not the normal time saving state, that is, the special time saving state, in step S313-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18C) for the special time saving state (final fluctuation) is selected. , Step S313-8. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination table for the normal time saving state (final variation) and the special figure variation pattern determination table for the special time saving state (final variation) will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern using the selected special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in step S313-8, and sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined special figure fluctuation pattern in the main RAM 110c in step S313-9. In step S313-10, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined special figure fluctuation pattern is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination this time is performed. End the process. As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect, is performed.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 17 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 18A is before the end of the time saving state. It is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (before the final variation) that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol to be performed, and FIG. 18B is a special symbol performed at the end of the normal time saving state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for a normal time saving state (final fluctuation) referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the above, and FIG. 18C shows a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol performed at the end of the special time saving state. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for a special time saving state (final fluctuation) that is referred to when determining.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the type of the special symbol (starting port) for displaying the variation, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the determination result of the special symbol (stop special symbol data) ), The reach judgment random number value, the first hold number (U1) or the second hold number (U2), the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, the special figure fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the special symbol. The fluctuation time and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other, and for reference, the effect contents that can be executed by each special figure fluctuation pattern are described in the rightmost column.

As the effect contents shown in the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, "normal variation" and "shortening variation" mean that the three effect symbols 70a fluctuate apart at high speed and do not reach. It means that it stops at, and the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation.

Further, "reach" means that the player is expected to perform a jackpot game in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode to be caused. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), the same effect symbol 70a is "7" in the left side region and the right side region. Refers to a mode in which the remaining effect symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped at.

The "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, "normal reach" means a reach in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and the reach with the lowest expectation of a big hit. It has become. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are executed after the normal reach, and are super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, the player is informed that the three effect symbols 70a in the reach state are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and the jackpot game is executed using almost the entire display area of the image display device. It has come to perform a special production that makes you expect. In addition, "special SP reach" is performed with a special effect than "SP reach".

Further, "SPSP reach" is a special reach that is executed after the normal reach or the super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a in the reach state are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect than "SP reach". It has become like.

In addition, "full rotation reach" is a reach that is a big hit. For example, all three effect symbols 70a are the same and fluctuate at a low speed in a state of being aligned, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special effect than "SPSP reach".

In addition, the "chance production" is a production that incites whether it is an SP reach production, a special loss (shorter time), or a normal loss. For example, the three effect symbols 70a in the reach state are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

In addition, the "additional effect" is a special effect when a special loss (time reduction) is won in the variation display before the final round in the time reduction state, and the variation display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time reduction state. An additional effect is provided to indicate that the number of time reductions, which is the number of times, is added.

In addition, "result fluctuation" is a special effect for the fluctuation display, which is the final round of the normal time saving state, and uses almost the entire display area of the image display device to make a big hit from the so-called first hit, which is a big hit from the normal game state. A result display for displaying the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods in which the player is in an advantageous state with the game as an opportunity is executed.

Further, the "special variation" is an effect dedicated to the variation display which is the final round of the special time saving state, and whether or not a big hit is achieved by using the effect button 17 using almost the entire display area of the image display device. It is designed to perform a special production that incites the image.

In addition, "result revival fluctuation" is a special effect when a special loss (time reduction) is won in the fluctuation display that is the final round of the normal time reduction state, and the time reduction state resumes after executing the above-mentioned result display. It is designed to perform a revival production that shows that it will be done.

In addition, the "special revival fluctuation" is a special effect when a special loss (time reduction) is won in the fluctuation display which is the final inning of the special time reduction state, and whether or not the effect button 17 described above is used to make a big hit. After performing a special effect that incites the sword, a revival effect is performed to indicate that the time saving state will resume.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is that the type of the special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is that a variation effect in which a result is displayed is executed during the variation display which is the final round of the normal time saving state (series of advantageous periods). There are some points. By doing so, it is possible to make the player confirm the result of the game in the series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is that the result is not displayed during the fluctuation display which is the final round of the special time saving state (non-series advantageous period), and a special effect is produced. The point that is done is mentioned. By doing so, even though the jackpot game is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by displaying the result of the game in a series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied. Can be improved.

The fifth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is that the variation time of the special symbol tends to be shorter in the time-shortened state in which the game ball is more likely to win at the starting port than in the normal game state. (Short fluctuation time is easy to select). By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is executed per unit time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The selection ratio of the special figure fluctuation pattern may be changed for each set value, may be changed between an odd number setting and an even number setting, or is it a low setting (for example, 1 to 2). It may be changed depending on whether it is a high setting (for example, 3 to 4). In addition, a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may be provided for each set value, a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may be provided for one of the odd number setting and the even number setting, and a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may not be provided for the other. A dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may be provided on one of the low setting and the high setting, and a dedicated special figure fluctuation pattern may not be provided on the other.

In addition, although there is only one type of fluctuation pattern determined at the time of special loss (time reduction), multiple types may be provided. In this case, two types of chance effects with different expectations for special loss (time reduction) are produced. May be provided.

In addition, the result display is not performed during the fluctuation display, which is the final round of the special time reduction state, but during the normal time reduction state, a special loss (time reduction) is won and the time reduction state continues. In that case, since this time saving state also becomes a series of advantageous sections, the result display may be performed in the final variable display.

In addition, during the normal time saving state, the special loss (time saving) was won and the time saving state continued, and during the continuation of this time saving state, the special loss (time saving) was won and the time saving state continued repeatedly. As a result, the time saving state continues when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from (clearing 0 of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game that caused the normal time saving state during this time saving state) reaches the specified number of times. In that case, since this time saving state also becomes a series of advantageous sections, the result display may be performed in the final variable display.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 19A is a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state, which is referred to when pre-determining the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port during the non-time-saving state. (B) is a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state, which is referred to when pre-determining the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the pre-judgment table, the type of the special symbol (starting port), the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the judgment result of the special symbol, the random value for the reach judgment, and the judgment of the special figure fluctuation pattern are displayed. A random value, a special figure schedule fluctuation pattern as a determination result, and a look-ahead designation command indicating the special figure schedule fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

In the preliminary judgment of the special symbol judgment information, it is possible to judge whether it is "big hit", "special loss (time saving)", or "normal loss" by the random value for big hit judgment, and it is special by the random value for special symbol judgment. Since the type of the symbol can be determined and the type of the special figure scheduled variation pattern to be executed can be determined in advance by the reach determination random value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value, the effect control board 130 pre-reads. From the specified command, it is possible to specify whether it is a big hit, a special loss (time reduction) or a loss, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol schedule fluctuation pattern.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 described above has elapsed. If the stop time has not passed, the special symbol stop process this time is terminated, and if the stop time has passed, it is determined whether or not the current state is a high probability state. In the case of a high probability state, the process is transferred to step S330-4, and in the case of a high probability state, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c in step S330-3, specifically, a predetermined condition. The number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) is updated by +1. Here, the number of fluctuations is updated by +1 regardless of whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display. In addition, in the case of a high probability state, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol is not updated.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a indicates whether or not the current time saving state (time saving game state, probability variation game state) is in progress, specifically, the time saving state flag (normal time saving state) is set in the main RAM 110c. Whether or not the normal time saving state flag, the first special time saving state flag indicating the first special time saving state, and the second special time saving state flag indicating the second special time saving state are set). To judge. If it is in the time saving state, the process is transferred to step S330-5, and if it is not in the time saving state (normal game state), the process is transferred to step S330-8.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a is stored in the main RAM 110c for a non- "0" time reduction number (normal time reduction number corresponding to the normal time reduction state, first special time reduction number corresponding to the first special time reduction state, third The third special time reduction number corresponding to the special time reduction state) is updated by -1, and in step S330-6, there is a time reduction number (1st time reduction number, 2nd time reduction number, 3rd time reduction number) that becomes "0". Judge whether or not. If there is no time reduction number that becomes "0", the process is transferred to step S330-8, and if there is a time reduction number that becomes "0", the time reduction state set in the main RAM 110c in step S330-7. Clear the time saving state flag corresponding to the number of time saving times that became "0" among the flags.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a jackpot special symbol (big hit winning). If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-9, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (a special loss special symbol or a normal loss special symbol), the process is transferred to step S330-13.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a clears various game state flags (various time saving state flags, high-probability game flags) set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-10, the opening according to the type of jackpot game. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the opening effect of the jackpot game in the main RAM 110c, sets "3" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S330-12, and steps S330-22. Move the process to.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is in a high probability state. If it is in a high probability state, the process is transferred to step S330-22 as if the time saving state is not generated, and if it is not in the high probability state, it is processed in step S330-15 as if the time saving state may be generated. To move.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol displayed as stopped is a special loss special symbol (time saving winning). If it is a special loss special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-15, and if it is not a special loss special symbol (it is a normal loss special symbol), the process is transferred to step S330-17.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a sets the number of time reductions at the time of winning the special loss (for example, 200 times) to the first special time reduction number set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-16, the first special time reduction state. The first special time saving state flag indicating that is set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special time saving state occurs.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c has reached a predetermined number of times (here, 800 times). When the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process is transferred to step S330-18, and when the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the process is transferred to step S330-20.

In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the number of time reductions (for example, 800 times) when the specified number of times is reached to the second special time reduction number set in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-19, the second special time reduction state. The second special time saving state flag indicating that is set in the main RAM 110c. As a result, the second special time saving state occurs.

In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a sets a time reduction number designation command indicating the time reduction number (first special time reduction number, second special time reduction number) set in the main RAM 110c in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. , In step S330-21, "0" is set in the special figure special electric processing data. As a result, the time reduction number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing such as displaying the remaining time reduction number is executed on the effect control board 130.

In step S330-22, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command indicating the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the special symbol stop process this time. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for performing the effect according to the game state specified by the game state designation command is executed.

In this way, when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed (the result of the jackpot judgment is a special loss (time reduction)) when not in the high probability state, the first special time reduction state is generated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the time saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) when not in the high probability state reaches the specified number of times. Since the second special time saving state is generated, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the time saving state occurs without going through the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, since the number of time reductions when the second special time reduction state occurs is larger than the number of time reductions when the first special time reduction state occurs, the playability changes depending on the type of special time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the number of fluctuations (800 times) in which the second special time reduction state occurs is a value larger than the time reduction number (100 times) set in the normal time reduction state, the second special time reduction state is performed during the normal time reduction state. Since the time saving state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player cannot understand the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the fluctuation display of the special symbol at the time of winning the special loss (time reduction) is the fluctuation display that becomes the specified number of times from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game). In that case, after the process of generating the first special time saving state by winning the special loss (time saving) is performed, the change display of the special symbol from the fulfillment of the predetermined condition becomes the specified number of times, so that the second special time saving state is reached. Since the process of generating the state is performed, the result of the jackpot determination is not wasted, and it is possible to perform control according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the final variation display in the normal time saving state, if the special loss (time saving) is won, the time saving state is extended (the first special time saving state is generated), so that the time saving is shortened. It is possible to make the player feel that the addition of the state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. When the normal time reduction state is switched to the first special time reduction state, the main display device 70 executes an additional effect to add the remaining time reduction number, and the display mode (characters) of the remaining time reduction number before and after the addition of the remaining time reduction number. The color, font, size, etc.) may not change, or the display mode of the remaining time reduction may change before and after the addition of the remaining time reduction.

In addition, the variation display of the final round in the first special time saving state becomes the specified number of times from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), that is, the time saving state. Even if the variable display is supposed to end, the time saving state is continued (the second special time saving state is generated), so it can be made to feel that the time saving state is added (extended). , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. When the normal time reduction state is switched to the first special time reduction state, the main display device 70 executes an additional effect to add the remaining time reduction number, and the display mode (characters) of the remaining time reduction number before and after the addition of the remaining time reduction number. The color, font, size, etc.) may not change, or the display mode of the remaining time reduction may change before and after the addition of the remaining time reduction.

In addition, even during the normal time saving state, if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed (the result of the jackpot judgment is a special loss (time saving)), the normal time saving state and the first special time saving state are displayed. Even if the normal time reduction number becomes 0, the time reduction state will continue until the first special time reduction number becomes 0, and the time reduction state will be added. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it feel like this. When the first special time saving state is generated in an overlapping manner during the normal time saving state, the main display device 70 executes an additional effect when the first special time saving state is generated in an overlapping manner, and the remaining time saving number is added (first). (Adding the value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the normal time saving state from the remaining number of times in the special time saving state), or when the normal time saving state ends and the first special time saving state is reached, the main display device 70 adds an effect. It may be executed and the remaining number of time reductions is added (the remaining number of times in the first special time reduction state is added), but in either case, the display mode (character color) of the remaining time reductions before and after the addition of the remaining time reductions , Font, size, etc.) may not change, or the display mode of the remaining time may be changed before and after the addition.

In addition, even during the first special time saving state, the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) becomes the specified number of times. When it reaches, the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state are generated in an overlapping manner, so even if the first special time saving number becomes 0, the second special time saving number becomes 0. Until then, the time saving state will continue, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player feel that the time saving state has been added. When the second special time saving state is generated in an overlapping manner during the first special time saving state, the main display device 70 executes an additional effect when the second special time saving state is generated in an overlapping manner, and the remaining time saving number is added ( (Adding the value obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times of the first special time saving state from the remaining number of times of the second special time saving state), or when the first special time saving state ends and the second special time saving state is reached, the main display The device 70 may perform an additional effect to add the remaining number of time reductions (add the remaining number of times in the second special time reduction state), but in either case, the remaining number of time reductions before and after the addition of the remaining time reductions The display mode (character color, font, size, etc.) of the above may not be changed, or the display mode of the number of remaining hours may be changed before and after the addition.

Further, when the second special time saving state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0 (whether or not the number of fluctuations exceeds 800, the number of fluctuations exceeds 1400). It is possible to determine whether the second special time saving state is occurring or whether the second special time saving state has already occurred). Therefore, the second special time saving state does not occur again between the jackpot games (after the second special time saving state starts or ends), and the profit balance between the game store side and the player side can be secured. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regardless of the type of special loss special symbol, the number of time reductions in the first special time reduction state was constant (200 times), but the number of time reductions at the time of winning the special loss was different depending on the type of special loss special symbol. May be good. In this case, in the case of the special loss special symbol 20, 200 times may be set as the time reduction number, and in the case of the special loss special symbol 21, 300 times may be set as the time reduction number. In the case of the special loss special symbol 20, 50 times, which is less than the 100 times set as the time reduction number in the normal time reduction state, is set, and in the case of the special loss special symbol 21, the time reduction number in the normal time reduction state is set. It is also possible to set 200 times, which is more than 100 times set as.

Further, regardless of the type of the special loss special symbol, when the special loss special symbol is to be stopped and displayed, the number of time reductions may be determined by lottery. In this case, 200 times may be set as the number of time reductions at a rate of 60%, and 50 times may be set as the number of time reductions at a rate of 40%, or vice versa.

In addition, the number of time reductions set when the special loss (time reduction) is won is larger than the number of time reductions (100 times) in the normal time reduction state (200 times), but it is larger than the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state. A small number of times (for example, 50 times) may be set.

In addition, if a special loss (time reduction) is won during the normal time reduction state and the time reduction number of 50 times is set, the remaining number of times in the normal time reduction state is more than 50 times (for example, 60 times). In the case of, the remaining number of times in the normal time saving state (60 times) is maintained as it is without setting 50 times as the time saving number, and the remaining number of times in the normal time saving state is less than 50 times (for example, 30 times). In some cases, 50 times may be newly set as the number of time reductions.

In addition, it is determined whether or not a special loss has been won (first lottery), and if a special loss has been won, the type of special loss special symbol has been determined (second lottery). Rather than performing a two-stage lottery in which the number of time reductions in the first special time reduction state (200 times or 50 times) is determined, the number of time reductions in the first special time reduction state (200 times or 50 times) is determined by the one-stage lottery. You may try to do it.

Specifically, the first special loss (time reduction) and the second special loss (time reduction) are provided as the special loss to be won as a result of the jackpot judgment, and when the first special loss (time reduction) is won, the first special time reduction is achieved. 200 times may be determined as the number of time reductions in the state, and 50 times may be determined as the number of time reductions in the first special time reduction state when the second special loss (time reduction) is won. In this case, the special symbol 20 may be determined when the first special loss (time reduction) is won, and the special symbol 21 may be determined when the second special loss (time reduction) is won.

If the first special loss (time reduction) and the second special loss (time reduction) are provided as the special loss to be won as a result of the jackpot judgment, the number of jackpots to be won as a result of the jackpot judgment will be multiple depending on the type of jackpot. Types may be provided. For example, as a result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the first jackpot in which the first jackpot game is executed, the second jackpot in which the second jackpot game is executed, and the third jackpot in which the third jackpot game is executed are executed. As a result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, it is preferable to provide a first jackpot in which the first jackpot game is executed and a second jackpot in which the second jackpot game is executed. In this case, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the special symbol 01 is determined when the first jackpot is won, the special symbol 02 is determined when the second jackpot is won, and the special symbol 03 is determined when the third jackpot is won. In the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the special symbol 04 may be determined when the first jackpot is won, and the special symbol 05 may be determined when the second jackpot is won.

In addition, from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) to the elapse of the predetermined period, the remaining number of fluctuations displayed until the second special time saving state occurs is displayed. The command to be shown may not be transmitted to the effect control board 130, and when a predetermined period has elapsed, a command indicating the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the second special time saving state occurs may be transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

Further, although the condition for ending the time saving state is only the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol, a plurality of conditions may be set. For example, the variable display of the special symbol may be executed 200 times, the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed 100 times, and the time saving state may be terminated when either of them is satisfied. In the case of a gaming machine that executes a winning game, the number of times of executing the variable display of the special symbol is 200 times, the number of times of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is 100 times, and the number of small hit games is 5 times. , The time saving state may be terminated when any one of them is satisfied.

In addition, in the variation display of the special symbol that is the last inning in the time saving state, the time saving state is terminated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, but the variation display of the special symbol that is the last inning in the time saving state is started. At that point, the time saving state may be terminated.

In addition, when the special loss (time reduction) is won during the normal time reduction state and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special time reduction state is generated, but the special loss (time reduction) is generated during the normal time reduction state. ), Even if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be invalidated so that the normal time saving state is continued without causing the first special time saving state.

In addition, when the special loss (time reduction) is won during the first special time reduction state and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special time reduction state is newly generated, but the first special time reduction state is generated. Even if a special loss (time reduction) is won and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be invalidated so that the first special time reduction state is not newly generated.

In addition, when the special loss (time reduction) is won during the second special time reduction state and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special time reduction state is generated, but during the second special time reduction state. Even if the special loss (time reduction) is won and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be invalidated so that the second special time reduction state is continued without causing the first special time reduction state.

In addition, when the specified condition is satisfied (RWM clear is executed, the number of fluctuations is 0 cleared based on the end of the jackpot game) during the first special time reduction state, and the fluctuation display that becomes the specified number of times is executed, the second special time reduction state is displayed. Although it is designed to be generated, the fluctuation display that becomes the specified number of times is executed from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) during the first special time saving state. However, it may be invalidated so that the second special time saving state is not generated.

Further, in the case where the special loss is won during the time saving state (during the probabilistic game state, the first special time saving state, the second special time saving state), but the first special time saving state is not generated (for example, in FIG. 18A). In the case where the special figure variation pattern 34 is determined), the addition failure effect may be executed without executing the addition effect, or the long variation effect may be executed without executing the addition effect or the addition failure effect. Alternatively, the addition failure effect and the long variation effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio.

Further, when the second special time reduction state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and the second special time reduction occurrence flag indicating that the second special time reduction has already occurred is set to the main RAM 110c. It may be set in (RWM for games). In this case, if there is no second special time reduction generated flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (800 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 to generate the second special time reduction state, and the second special time reduction has already occurred. If there is a flag, it is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 so that the second special time saving state is not generated.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a acquires the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in step S350-1, selects the game state setting table (see FIG. 22) in step S350-2, and in step S350-3. The stop special figure data is collated with the game state setting table to determine the game state after the jackpot game is completed. The details of the game state setting table will be described later.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game state information (high probability state flag, normal time reduction state flag, normal time reduction number of times) according to the determined game state in the main RAM 110c. As a result, a probabilistic game state or a time-saving game state (normal time-saving state) will occur.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets the time reduction number designation command corresponding to the set normal time reduction number in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the time reduction number designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing such as displaying the time reduction remaining number is executed.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state specification command according to the game state after setting in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c, sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data, and this time. Ends the jackpot game end process. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for performing the effect according to the current game state is executed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting a game state after the jackpot game is completed. In the game state setting table, stop special figure data (type of jackpot game), game state after the end of the jackpot game, and game state information according to each game state (high probability game indicating that it is a high probability state). The presence / absence of a flag set, the presence / absence of a normal time reduction state flag set indicating that the normal time reduction state is set, and the number of normal time reductions) are associated with each other.

For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", the time-saving game state is selected as the game state, the normal time-saving state flag is set without setting the high-probability state flag, and the normal time-saving number of times is set to ". "100" times will be set.

When the stop special figure data is "02", the probability variation game state is selected as the game state, the high probability state flag and the normal time reduction state flag are set, and the normal time reduction number of times is "10000" times. It is set. Regarding this normal time saving number of 10000 times, when considering the jackpot probability in the high probability state, it is a number that is extremely unlikely to be reached, so it is a number that will continue until the next jackpot. There is.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 22 is that whether or not the high probability state flag and the normal time saving state flag are set does not change depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 22 is that the set normal time reduction number does not change depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Although the normal time reduction number of times when the probabilistic game state is selected is set to 10,000 times, it may be continued until the next big hit without setting the normal time reduction number of times.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
A general control process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the Fuzu general electric processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded Fuzu general electric processing data, and performs processing corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute and end the current Fuzu Fuden control process.

Specifically, if the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 0, the processing for executing the variable display of the normal symbol based on the hold storage (Public figure determination information) and the Fuzu Fuden processing data are set to "1". The normal symbol variation process (step S410) for performing the process of changing to is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later.

If the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 1, to execute an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 47 in a predetermined mode, or to change the Fuzu Fuden processing data to "0". (Step S420) is executed.

(Normal symbol variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. If the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-12, and if the variation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol hold number (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the normal symbol hold number (G) to update the data, and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. The normal map determination information stored in the 1st storage unit to the 4th storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the normal figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the general figure determination information reservation storage area. Further, the normal figure judgment information stored in the first storage unit of the normal figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit which is the normal figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit. The normal map judgment information used in the previous game is deleted.

The main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, using a hit determination table for ordinary symbols (see FIG. 25 (a)), whether or not to win is determined based on the game state and the hit determination random value stored in the normal diagram execution storage area. decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 25 (b)), the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display based on the game state, the hit judgment result, and the normal symbol judgment random value. Decide the stop symbol data of the symbol. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the stop normal figure data.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a performs the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, using the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 25 (c)), the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random value. Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). The details of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the normal figure variation pattern can be grasped on the effect control board 130.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-11, it is normal. The symbol variation display is started, and the normal symbol variation process this time is completed. As a result, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the normal symbol is created in the data creation process of the step S700, and is output by the output control process of the step S800, so that the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 62. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped in step S410-13, and the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped in step S410-14. , Ordinary symbol confirmation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol has stopped and displayed on the effect control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped-displayed normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (winning). If it is not a hit normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a hit normal symbol, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 25 (d)) in step S410-16. Acquire auxiliary game control data for playing. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of auxiliary game in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game has been started on the effect control board 130.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in 410-16 of the auxiliary game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, the normal power processing is performed. "1" is set in the data, and the normal symbol change processing this time is completed.

(Collision detection table for ordinary symbols)
FIG. 25A is a hit determination table for a normal symbol that is referred to when a hit is determined based on the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the hit judgment table for ordinary symbols, the game state at the time of hit judgment, the random value for hit judgment, and the judgment result of hit judgment (hit, loss) correspond. It is attached, and the approximate winning probability is listed in the rightmost column for reference.

“Hit” is a determination result that the auxiliary game will be executed, and “loss” is a determination result that the auxiliary game is not executed. In the collision detection, only normal loss is performed and no special loss (time reduction) is set.

The first feature of the hit determination table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 25 (a) is that the gaming state is a non-time saving state (normal gaming state) or a time saving state (time saving gaming state (normal time saving state, first). Regardless of whether it is in the special time saving state, the second special time saving state), or the probabilistic game state), the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a hit is the same. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the auxiliary game is executed regardless of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the hit determination table for ordinary symbols shown in FIG. 25 (a) is that the hit probability does not change depending on the set value and is constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the probability (ratio) of the normal time saving state and the probabilistic game state via the jackpot game is higher than the non-time saving state (normal game state). In this case, the probability (ratio) of hitting the non-time saving state (normal game state) and various special time saving states (first special time saving state, second special time saving state) should be the same. You may. In this case, it is preferable that the first special time saving state does not overlap with the normal time saving state. In addition, the probability (ratio) of the time-saving game state (normal time-saving state, first special time-saving state, second special time-saving state) and the probability variation game state being determined to be a hit is higher than the non-time-saving state (normal game state). It may be.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG. 25B is a normal symbol determination table referred to when determining a stop symbol of a normal symbol based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the normal symbol judgment table, the game state at the time of judgment, the judgment result of hit judgment (hit, loss), the random value for hit symbol judgment, and the normal symbol judgment are displayed. The determination result, the stop normal symbol data indicating the determination result, and the ordinary symbol designation command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a lost normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a normal symbol when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened once is executed.
The normal symbol "2" is a normal symbol when the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened twice is executed.

The first feature of the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 25 (b) is that two types of ordinary symbols are set to execute an auxiliary game in which the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is different. Be done. By doing so, the playability of the auxiliary game can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIG. 25B is that the selection ratio of ordinary symbols does not change depending on the set value and is constant. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Public map fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 25 (c) is a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation pattern of a normal symbol based on the normal map determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal map gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table, the game state at the time of judgment, the judgment result of the hit judgment, the normal figure fluctuation pattern random value, and the judgment of the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment The resulting fluctuation time is associated with the general map fluctuation pattern specification command indicating this determination result.

The first feature of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 (c) is that a relatively long fluctuation time is determined in the non-time reduction state (normal game state), whereas the time reduction state (normal time reduction state) is determined. , 1st special time saving state, 2nd special time saving state, probabilistic gaming state), a relatively short fluctuation time is determined, that is, a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be determined in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 47 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 (c) is that the selection ratio of each normal map fluctuation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the fluctuation pattern of the normal map, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 25 (d) is an auxiliary game control table used for controlling the auxiliary game based on the type of the hit normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 25 (d), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop chart data, the number of times the second start port 47 is opened, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , The first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between opening, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 25 (d) is that the time reduction state (normal time reduction state, first special time reduction state) is higher than the case where the auxiliary game is executed in the non-time reduction state (normal game state). , The second special time saving state, the probabilistic game state), the opening time of the second starting port 47 becomes longer when the auxiliary game is executed. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 47 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 25 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, second start) in the normal time reduction state, the first special time reduction state, the second special time reduction state, and the probabilistic game state. There is no difference in the number of times the mouth 47 is opened and the time value at which the second starting port 47 is opened. By doing so, the player becomes advantageous regardless of the time saving state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the first special time saving state is generated during the normal time saving state, the first special time saving state is generated during the first special time saving state, and the second special time saving state is generated during the first special time saving state. Even so, since the performance in the front and rear time reduction states is the same, it is possible to avoid complicated control and to realize a pure addition of time reduction times.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 25 (d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, and the time value at which the second starting port 47 is opened. ) Is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the progress of the auxiliary game, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

It should be noted that, depending on the type of special loss special symbol that generated the first special time saving state, at least one of the performances of the auxiliary game (opening time, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened, and the time value that the second starting port 47 is opened). One) may be different. For example, when the first special time saving state is generated by the first special loss special symbol, the opening time is set to 1 second, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is set to 1, and the second starting is performed. The opening time of the mouth 47 is set to 3 seconds (3 seconds in total), and when the first special time saving state is caused by the second special loss special symbol, the opening time is 1. It is set to 5 seconds, the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is set to 2, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 2.5 seconds (5 seconds in total). May be good.

Further, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the second starting port 47 is opened) depending on whether it is in the normal time saving state, the first special time saving state, the second special time saving state, or the probabilistic game state. The number of times of operation and at least one of the time values at which the second starting port 47 is opened may be different. If the performance of the auxiliary game is different between the normal time reduction state and the first special time reduction state, the first special is displayed even if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed by winning the special loss (time reduction) during the normal time reduction state. In order to prevent the time saving state from occurring and to make the performance of the auxiliary game different between the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state, the variation display of the special symbol becomes the specified number of times during the first special time saving state. Also, the second special time saving state may not be generated, and the first special time saving state may not be generated even if the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed by winning the special loss (time saving) during the second special time saving state. ..

Further, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, the second starting port 47 is opened) depending on whether it is in the normal time saving state, the first special time saving state, the second special time saving state, or the probabilistic game state. When the number of times of operation and at least one of the time values at which the second starting port 47 is opened are different, and the first special time saving state overlaps during the normal time saving state, the normal time saving state is generated in the first special time saving state. The performance of the auxiliary game of the above may be taken over, or when the second special time saving state overlaps during the first special time saving state, the performance of the auxiliary game of the first special time saving state is performed in the second special time saving state. It may be taken over, or when the first special time saving state overlaps with each other during the second special time saving state, the performance of the auxiliary game of the second special time saving state may be taken over in the first special time saving state. ..

(External information data creation process of the main control board)
The external information data creation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the external information data creation process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S720-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. If there is no winning, the process is moved to step S720-3, and if there is a winning, in step S720-2, the external information data of the starting opening winning signal indicating that the game ball has won a prize is input to the starting opening. It is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol has stopped. If the fluctuation display is not stopped (either during the fluctuation display, waiting for customers, or during the jackpot game), the process is moved to step S720-5, and if the fluctuation display is stopped, step S720. In -4, the external information data of the symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation display of the special symbol has stopped is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-5 whether or not the jackpot game has been started. If the jackpot game has not started, the process is transferred to step S720-7, and if the jackpot game is started, in step S720-6, the outside of the special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. The information data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-7 whether or not the jackpot game is completed. If the jackpot game is not completed, the process is transferred to step S720-9, and if the jackpot game is completed, the special game set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c in step S720-8. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an advantageous state (including a jackpot game, a probabilistic game state, and a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state has been started. If the advantageous state has not been started, the process is transferred to step S720-11, and if the advantageous state is started, in step S720-10, the advantageous state signal indicating that the advantageous state is in progress is sent to the main RAM 110c. Set in the external information data output area of.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-11 whether or not the advantageous state has ended. If the advantageous state has not ended, the process is transferred to step S720-13, and if the advantageous state ends, the advantageous state set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c in step S720-12. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the frame opening that the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 opens has started. If the frame opening has not been started, the process is transferred to step S720-15, and if the frame opening is started, the external information of the frame opening signal indicating that the frame opening is being performed in step S720-14. The data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the frame opening is completed (the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed). If the frame opening is not completed, the process is transferred to step S720-17, and if the frame opening is completed, the frame opening set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is set in step S720-16. Clear the external information data of the signal.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S720-17 whether or not the RWM clear or security error (various abnormalities) has occurred. If no RWM clear or security error has occurred, the process is moved to step S720-19, and if an RWM clear or security error occurs, an RWM clear or security error has occurred in step S720-18. The external information data of the security signal indicating the above is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the conditions for paying out the prize balls of a predetermined unit (here, 10 pieces) are satisfied. If the payout condition is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S720-21, and if the payout condition is not satisfied, in step S720-20, the payout condition of the prize ball of the predetermined unit is satisfied. The external information data of the prize ball scheduled signal shown is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the payout of the prize balls of a predetermined unit (here, 10 pieces) is completed. If the payout of the prize balls is not completed, the external information data creation process is completed this time, and if the payout of the prize balls is completed, the payout of the prize balls in a predetermined unit is completed in step S720-22. The external information data of the prize ball payout signal indicating that the prize ball has been paid out is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c, and the external information data creation process this time is completed.

The various external information data set in the external information data output area are output to the outside of the game machine 1 as game information from various terminals of the game information output terminal board by the output control process of step S750 described above. Become.

(Explanation of various signals output as game information)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the types of various signals output as game information from the various output terminals of the game information output terminal plate 90, the output timings of the various signals, and the output periods of the various signals.

From the first terminal, a starting port winning signal is output for 100 ms when the game ball is won in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47.
From the second terminal, a symbol confirmation signal is output for 500 ms when the stop display of the special symbol is displayed.
From the third terminal, a special game signal is output from the start of the jackpot game to the continuation of the jackpot game.
An advantageous state signal is output from the fourth terminal from the start of the advantageous state to the continuation of the advantageous state.

From the fifth terminal, a frame opening signal is output from the time when the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected to the continuous opening.
From the sixth terminal, a security signal is output for 200 ms from the time of occurrence of various abnormalities (RWM clear, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, payout abnormality).
From the seventh terminal, a payout schedule signal is output for 100 ms from the time when the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is determined.
From the eighth terminal, a payout completion signal is output for 100 ms from the time when the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is completed.

In this way, since the game information is output to the outside of the game machine 1 via the game information output terminal plate 90, the operating state of the game machine 1 is monitored and performed by an information collecting device such as a hall computer. It becomes possible to perform analysis and the like.

(Game ball counting process on the main control board)
The game ball counting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a game ball counting process (information program) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S741, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state. If the player is in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to step S742 to count the number of payouts in the normal game state, and if the player is not in the normal game state, the number of payouts in the normal game is not counted. As a result, the process is transferred to step S750.

In step S742, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won in the general winning opening 43, and the process is moved to step S744. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is moved to the general winning opening 43. In step S743, "5", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the general winning opening 43, is added to the normal payout number counter for counting the number of normal payouts. It should be noted that the normal payout number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S744, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first winning opening detection switch 50a or the second winning opening detection switch 56a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won in the big winning opening, and the process is moved to step S746. If the detection signal is input, the game ball wins in the big winning opening. As a result, in step S745, "10" or "8", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the type of the large winning opening, is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S746, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 45a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won a prize in the first start port 45, and the process is transferred to step S748. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is transferred to the first start port 45. Assuming that the game ball has won a prize, in step S747, "3", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the first starting port 45, is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S748, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 47a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the game ball has not won in the second start port 47, and the process is transferred to step S750. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is transferred to the second start port 47. Assuming that the game ball has won a prize, in step S749, "1", which is the number of payouts (number of prize balls) corresponding to the second starting port 47, is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the out-ball detection switch 39a. When the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that there is no out ball which is a game ball discharged from the game area 5a, and when the current game ball counting process is finished and the detection signal is input, it is assumed that there is no out ball. Assuming that there was an out ball, in step S751, "1" is added to the total out number counter for counting the out ball (total out number) in all the gaming states. The total out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S752, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state. If the player is not in the normal game state, the current game ball counting process is terminated, and if the player is in the normal game state, the number of outs in the normal game state (the number of outs in the normal game) is counted in step S753. "1" is added to the normal out number counter to end the game ball counting process this time. The normal medium out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

In this way, before the progress control of the game is performed (the initial setting process of step S10 described above), the progress control of the game is performed while the progress control of the game is performed without counting and storing the number of payouts and the number of outs (described above). Since the number of normal payouts, the number of normal middle outs, and the total number of outs, which are game information (history information) in the initial setting process of step S10, are counted and stored, the player can execute the game. It becomes possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) of the game machine at that time, and it becomes possible to use it for the calculation of the performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the game machine.

(Performance information calculation processing of main control board)
FIG. 29 describes the performance information calculation process of the main control board 110 with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the performance information calculation process (information program) of the main control board 110.

In the present embodiment, the state in which the power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 is divided into a plurality of gaming sections, and the performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine is displayed. Therefore, first, the game section will be described.

The game section is divided by the total number of outs, and the total number of outs counted from the first power-on or from 0 clear (initialization) of the information RWM area due to a data abnormality is 300. Is the first game section, and after the first game section, the game section is switched every 60,000 total outs, and the second game section, the third game section, the fourth game section ... It becomes N game section.

First, in step S761, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the section counter for counting the number of game sections is the first game section value (0) indicating that it is the first game section. do. If it is the first game section value, it is assumed that the current is the first game section for which the performance information is not calculated, and the process is moved to step S762. If it is not the first game section value, the present is the performance information. The process is transferred to step S763, assuming that the game section is the game section after the second game section to be calculated. The section counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S762, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total outs counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If it is equal to or more than the first section update value, the processing is transferred to step S768 as the game section is updated, and if it is not more than the first section update value, the game section is not updated. End the calculation process.

In step S763, the main CPU 110a is based on the number of normal medium payouts in the current game section indicated by the normal medium payout counter and the normal medium out number in the current game section indicated by the normal medium out number counter as performance information. The value is calculated and rounded to the first decimal place, and in step S764, the rounded normal base value is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the information RWM area.

The "normal base value" is a game value amount used for a game during a normal game state (the number of outs, which is the number of game balls fired into or discharged from the game area) during the normal game state. It is the ratio (ratio) of the game value amount (the number of game balls to be paid out to the player) that is to be given in the game, and is "(normal number of payouts in the normal game state). It is calculated by the formula of "the number of medium payouts ÷ the number of outs in the normal game state (the number of normal medium outs) x 100".

The "base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base value in the four game sections, the first area for storing the normal base value in the current game section, and the previous one. To store the second area for storing the normal base value in the game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before. It is composed of the fourth region of.

In step S765, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total outs counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If it is equal to or more than the second section update value, the processing is transferred to step S766 as the game section is updated, and if it is not more than the second section update value, the game section is not updated. End the calculation process.

In addition, the total number of outs is 60,000, which divides the game section after the second game section, and this number of 60,000 is about one day in a game machine that shoots 100 game balls per minute. It is a number that can guarantee the operating portion of. Therefore, the gaming section is updated when the gaming machine operates all day long.

In step S766, the main CPU 110a shifts the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area one by one, and clears the first area of the base storage area to 0 in step S767. As a result, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value in the previous game section, the normal base value in the current game section is reset, and preparations are made to move to the next game section. Be struck.

In step S768, the main CPU 110a updates the game section by adding "1" to the section counter, and in step S769, the total number of outs indicated by the above-mentioned total out number counter and the normal medium payout indicated by the normal medium payout counter. The number and the number of normal middle outs indicated by the normal middle out number counter are cleared to 0, a process of shifting to the next game section is performed, and the current performance information calculation process is completed.

By updating the game section according to the total number of outs in this way, it is allowed that there is a state in which different set values are set in one game section. Therefore, it is possible to obtain (store) game information (history information such as the total number of outs, the number of normal outs, the number of normal payouts, etc.) that spans a plurality of set values in one game section, and it is hindered by the setting change. It is possible to calculate performance information (usually base value) without having to.

In addition, since the normal base value (a type of history information) is calculated and stored as performance information for each game section from the number of normal outs and the number of normal payouts for each game section, the gaming machine It is possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance.

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal times, and the number of outs during normal times are set values because they are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). Performance information (usually the base value) excluding the influence of the above can be calculated, stored, and displayed, which can be useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, by not calculating the normal base value in the first game section, operation confirmation in the pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine (operation confirmation of various winning openings detection switch and out ball detection switch by launching and caring for the game ball) ) Will no longer provide unreliable information, and it will be possible to avoid inconveniences such as misleading the actual performance of the gaming machine.

In addition, after the second gaming section, by calculating the normal base value, it is possible to display a highly credible normal base value that eliminates the influence of the pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine, and the actual performance of the gaming machine can be displayed. It is possible to provide highly credible information for accurate grasping.

In addition, every time the performance information calculation process is executed (every 4 milliseconds), the normal base value is calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area, but the normal base value in the current game section Is displayed on the information display 113 (every 20 seconds), the normal base value in the current game section may be calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area.

In addition, in the first game section, the number of normal payouts and the number of normal middle outs are counted even though the normal base value is not calculated, but the number of normal middle payouts and the number of normal middle outs should not be counted. It may be.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 30, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process (information program) of the main control board 110.

First, in step S771, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the display switching time counter for determining whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is the display switching value (0). If it is a display switching value, the process is moved to step S772 to switch the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113, and if it is not the display switching value, it is displayed on the information display 113. The process is moved to step S776 assuming that the performance information is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value. Further, the display switching time counter is set in the information RWM area.

In step S772, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmed flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is moved to step S774 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information display 113 is displayed. The process is moved to step S773 to confirm the lighting of. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 773, the main CPU 110a provides display data for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. The determination is made, and the process is transferred to step S776.

In step S774, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for displaying on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is stored. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired. The data selection counter value will be updated in step S782, which will be described later.

In step S775, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value, the information display 113a The display data of the normal base value to be displayed in is determined, and the process is moved to step S776.

In step S776, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process (game program) of step S800 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is information. It will be displayed on the display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S777, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned display switching time counter, and in step S778, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is moved to step S785. If it is larger than the upper limit value, it is displayed on the information display 113. Assuming that the time for switching the performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S779.

In step S780, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is moved to step S782, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S781, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area and the process is moved to step S785. ..

In step S782, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S783, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S785, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S784, and the process is moved to step S785.

In step S785, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area in step S723 described above, and in step S786, returns the game stack pointer saved in the information RWM area in step S721. The display data setting process ends.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 31. In the table of display information of FIG. 31, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2." Indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal medium outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of outs in normal is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment includes the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information of "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the two 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed in the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it becomes easy to grasp that the normally displayed base value currently displayed is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but any one or two are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed in the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

In addition, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, and the second big winning opening 56 by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out ball composed of the game balls that have flowed into the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first major winning opening detection switch 50a, the second major winning opening detection switch. Every time the game ball is detected by 56a, the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) may be added by one.

(Timing chart when a normal time saving condition occurs)
FIG. 32 is a timing chart when a normal time saving state occurs.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal game state, all the information such as the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value and the total number of outs for setting the game section are aggregated (counted). It is running.

Next, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the winning normal symbol is started. In this fluctuation display, the fluctuation display is performed according to a relatively long normal map fluctuation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbol is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for the jackpot) of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (opening) is started and the right. When the hitting indicator 67 lights up, the output of the special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in progress and the advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal game state is started. In addition, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped, and the aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for setting the game section continues (normal base value). And the display of the normal base value will continue).

Then, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the jackpot game (low probability non-time saving game state), the variation display is performed by a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the jackpot game. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T10, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the normal symbol is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the jackpot game, it is performed with a relatively long normal map fluctuation pattern for non-time saving states. Then, at the timing of T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the time-saving game state (normal time-saving state) is started, and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

Further, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is during the jackpot game (low accuracy). Since it was started during the non-time saving game state), the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T14, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (normal time-saving state), it is performed with a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the time-saving game state (normal time reduction). Since it was started during the state), the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. Then, at the timing of T16, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started.

Here, an example in which the normal time saving state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbol is shown, but even if the normal time saving state occurs during the stop display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, the next normal symbol From the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display will be performed according to the relatively short normal map fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

In this way, when the normal time saving state occurs, the normal time saving state occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the big hit game) after the stop display of the special symbol that becomes the big hit ends. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous during the jackpot game, and it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side.

In addition, when the normal time saving state (low probability time saving game state) occurs, the jackpot game which is the low probability time saving game state after the predetermined period before the normal time saving state occurs (the stop time of the normal loss special symbol has elapsed) The right-handed indicator 67 is turned on from (when it is started). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the occurrence of the normal time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time saving state (low probability time saving game state) occurs, the jackpot game which is the low probability time saving game state after the predetermined period before the normal time saving state occurs (the stop time of the normal loss special symbol has elapsed) From (when it is started), the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the normal base value can be calculated and the normal base value can be displayed. Since it is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a normal time saving state (low probability time saving game state) occurs, an advantageous state signal is output from a predetermined period before the normal time saving state occurs (at the start of the jackpot game which is the low probability time saving game state). It has become like. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when a normal time saving state occurs during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, a relatively short normal time fluctuation for the time saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed. Variable display by pattern is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the middle due to the occurrence of the normal time saving state.

In addition, when a normal time saving state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display is performed from the next normal symbol variation display to the relatively short normal time saving pattern for the time saving state, and the time saving is performed from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 will be opened with a long opening time for the state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load because it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or changing the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the normal time saving state.

(Timing chart when the normal time saving state ends)
FIG. 33 is a timing chart when the normal time saving state ends.

First, at the timing of T1, the variation display of the special symbol that is the final inning (100th inning) in the time saving state, that is, the variation display of the special symbol that is normally lost is started. At this time, since the time is shortened, the right-handed indicator 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, because the time is shortened, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), while the game section is set. Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is being executed.

Next, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the winning normal symbol is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving state, it is performed with a relatively short normal map fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the time saving state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for a short time state.

After that, at the timing of T5, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving state, it is performed with a relatively short normal map fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the time saving state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for a short time state.

Next, at the timing of T8, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this fluctuation display was started during the time saving state, it is performed with a relatively short normal map fluctuation pattern for the time saving state. Then, at the timing of T9, the stop display of the special symbol is started. In addition, the stop display of the normal symbol is started.

After that, at the timing of T10, when the stop time N of the special symbol (0.5 seconds for normal loss) elapses, the time saving state ends and the normal game state starts regardless of whether or not the customer is waiting. , The right-handed display 67 is turned off, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. In addition, since the game is in the normal game state, the totaling (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

Further, at the timing of T10, the variation display of the next special symbol, which is a normal loss, is started. In addition, the auxiliary game is started after the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed, but since the variation display of the normal symbol was started during the time saving state, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. become.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. Since this variation display is started during the normal gaming state, the variation display is performed according to a relatively long normal map variation pattern (variation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbol is disclosed, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the non-time saving state. Then, at the timing of T14, when the auxiliary game is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started.

Here, an example is shown in which the normal time saving state ends during the stop display of the normal symbol, but even when the normal time saving state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, the next normal symbol From the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display is performed according to a relatively long normal map fluctuation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

In addition, if the special loss (time reduction) is won in the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (100 times) from the start of the normal time reduction state, the special loss (time reduction) winning becomes invalid and the normal loss special symbol is stopped. Since it is displayed and the normal time saving state ends, the right-handed display 67 turns off and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped, and the number of normal payouts for calculating the normal base value and the normal medium out Counting of numbers is resumed.

In this way, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (100 times) from the start of the normal time reduction state, the normal time reduction state advantageous to the player ends. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side and provide the player with an unprecedented game property of a normal time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (100 times) from the start of the normal time reduction state, the normal time reduction state ends and the right-handed indicator 67 turns off. It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the end of the normal time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (100 times) from the start of the normal time saving state, the normal time saving state ends and the normal base value is calculated. The totaling (counting) of the number of regular payouts and the number of regular outs is resumed. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (100 times) from the start of the normal time saving state, the normal time saving state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It is designed to do. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the normal time saving state ends during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, a relatively long normal diagram for the non-time saving state is started from the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed. Fluctuations are displayed according to fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the way when the normal time saving state ends.

In addition, when a normal time saving state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the fluctuation display by the relatively long normal time saving pattern for the time saving state is performed from the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol, and the fluctuation display is performed from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for a short time state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load because it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or changing the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the normal time saving state.

(Timing chart from before the start to after the end of the first special time saving state)
FIG. 34 is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the first special time saving state due to the time saving (special loss) winning.

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a special loss (time reduction) is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal game state, all the information such as the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value and the total number of outs for setting the game section are aggregated (counted). It is running.

Next, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the winning normal symbol is started. In this fluctuation display, the fluctuation display is performed according to a relatively long normal map fluctuation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

Then, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special loss special symbol is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time M (2 seconds for special loss) of the special loss special symbol elapses, whether or not the customer is waiting. Regardless of this, the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state) is started, the right-handed indicator 67 is turned on, and the output of the advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is started. In addition, since the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state) is reached, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), and the game section is set. Aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for this is continued (calculation of normal base value and display of normal base value are also continued). Furthermore, the variable display of the special symbol, which is usually lost, is started.

Next, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the normal game state. Since it has been started, the second starting port 47 will be opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state), it is performed in a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the time-saving game state (first). Since it was started during the special time saving state), the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. In addition, the stop display of the normal loss special symbol is started.

Further, at the timing of T10, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for normal loss) of the normal loss special symbol elapses, the variation display of the next special symbol that becomes normal loss is started. Then, at the timing of T11, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state), it is performed in a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the variation display of the special symbol which is the final inning (200th inning) in the first special time saving state, here, the variation display of the special symbol which is usually lost is started. Further, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state), the long opening time for the time-saving state is the first. 2 The starting port 47 is opened.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state), it is performed in a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the time-saving game state (first). Since it was started during the special time saving state), the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T16, the stop display of the normal loss special symbol is started, and at the timing of T17, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for normal loss) of the normal loss special symbol elapses, the customer is in a waiting state. Regardless of whether or not, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is started, the right-handed indicator 67 is turned off, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. In addition, since the game is in the normal game state, the counting of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

Further, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), it is performed with a relatively long normal map variation pattern for the non-time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T18, the stop display of the normal loss special symbol is started, and at T19, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for normal loss) of the normal loss special symbol elapses, the special symbol that becomes normal loss becomes normal. The variable display is started. In addition, the stop display of the normal symbol is started.

Then, at the timing of T20, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state, the second opening time is short for the non-time saving state. The starting port 47 will be opened.

Here, an example is shown in which the first special time saving state is started during the variable display of the normal symbol, but even when the first special time saving state occurs during the stop display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, From the next variation display of the normal symbol, the variation display by the relatively short normal symbol variation pattern for the time saving state will be performed.

Further, although the example in which the first special time saving state ends during the execution of the auxiliary game is shown, even if the first special time saving state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol to be executed next is shown. From the fluctuation display of, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal map fluctuation pattern for the time saving state will be performed.

In this way, when the special loss special symbol different from the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special time saving state that is advantageous to the player occurs (starts) regardless of whether the customer is waiting or not. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented playability that a time saving state occurs even though the game is lost, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed for a longer time than the normal loss special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player notice that the special loss special symbol is stopped from the length of the stop time, that is, the first special time saving state occurs, and it is possible to produce that the first special time saving state occurs. It is possible to secure time to play and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed (the stop time elapses), the first special time saving state occurs (starts) and the right-handed display 67 lights up. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the occurrence of the first special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed (the stop time elapses), the first special time saving state occurs (starts) and the number of normal payouts and the number of normal medium outs for calculating the normal base value The totaling (counting) is stopped (interrupted), that is, the calculation of the normal medium payout number and the normal medium out number is continued until immediately before the first special time saving state occurs. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), the normal base value can be calculated and the normal base value can be displayed. Since it is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

Further, when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed (the stop time elapses), the first special time saving state is generated (started) and the advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the first special time saving state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbol, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol is relatively short for the time saving state. The fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern in the figure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the variation display of the normal symbol in the middle due to the occurrence of the first special time saving state.

In addition, when the first special time saving state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display of the next normal symbol is changed to the relatively short normal symbol variation pattern for the time saving state, and the next auxiliary game is performed. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for a short time state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the first special time saving state.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol which is the final round (200th round) in the first special time saving state, the predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear is executed, and the jackpot game is played. If it is not the change display of the special symbol of the specified number of times from (clearing 0 of the change number based on the end), the first special time saving state which is advantageous to the player is finished. Therefore, it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side and provide the player with an unprecedented game property of the first special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol which is the final round (200th round) in the first special time saving state, the predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear is executed, and the jackpot game is played. If it is not the variation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from (clearing 0 of the number of fluctuations based on the end), the first special time saving state ends and the right-handed display 67 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the end of the first special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (200 times) from the start of the first special time saving state, the predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear is executed, the jackpot game). If it is not the fluctuation display of the special symbol of the specified number of times from (clearing 0 of the number of fluctuations based on the end of In other words, the calculation of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal medium outs is restarted from the end of the first special time saving state. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the predetermined number of times (200 times) from the start of the first special time saving state, the predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear is executed, the jackpot game). If it is not the variation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from (clearing 0 of the number of fluctuations based on the end of), the first special time saving state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the first special time saving state ends during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, it is relatively long for the non-time saving state from the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed. Fluctuations are displayed according to the fluctuation pattern of the normal map. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the way when the first special time saving state is completed.

In addition, when the first special time saving state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display of the next normal symbol is changed to the relatively long normal symbol variation pattern for the time saving state, and the next auxiliary game is performed. The second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the first special time saving state.

In addition, even if the special loss (time reduction) is won during the first special time reduction state, if the first special time reduction state is not newly generated, the special loss special will be displayed in the final variation display in the first special time reduction state. Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special time saving state ends, so the right-handed display 67 turns off, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped, and the normal base value is calculated. Counting of the number of medium payouts and the number of normal medium outs will be resumed.

(Timing chart from before the start to the end of the second special time saving state)
FIG. 35 is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the second special time saving state when the variation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (800 times).

First, at the timing of T1, from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the fluctuation display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times (800 times), is started. Will be done. Further, at the timing of T2, the variation display of the normal symbol that is a hit is started. In this fluctuation display, the fluctuation display is performed according to a relatively long normal map fluctuation pattern (variation time is 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

After that, at the timing of T3, the stop display of the special symbol is started, and at the timing of T4, when the stop time M of the special symbol (2 seconds for normal loss, which is the specified number of times) elapses, is the customer waiting state? Regardless of whether or not, the time-saving game state (second special time-saving state) is started, the right-handed indicator 67 lights up, and the output of the advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is started. In addition, since the time-saving game state (second special time-saving state) is reached, the aggregation (counting) of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted), and the game section is set. Aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs for this is continued (calculation of normal base value and display of normal base value are also continued). Furthermore, the variable display of the special symbol, which is usually lost, is started.

Further, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T7, the change display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit after the auxiliary game ends is started. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (second special time-saving state), it is performed in a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the time-saving game state (second). Since it was started during the special time saving state), the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state. In addition, the stop display of the normal loss special symbol is started.

Further, at the timing of T10, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for normal loss) of the special symbol elapses, the variation display of the next special symbol that becomes normal loss is started. Further, at the timing of T11, the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit after the auxiliary game is completed is disclosed. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (second special time-saving state), it is performed in a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T12, the variation display of the special symbol which is the final inning in the second special time saving state, that is, the variation display of the special symbol which is normally lost is started. In addition, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the time-saving game state (second special time-saving state), the long opening time for the time-saving state is the first. 2 The starting port 47 is opened.

Next, at the timing of T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variation display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the time-saving game state (second special time-saving state), it is performed in a relatively short normal-figure variation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbol is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but the variable display of the normal symbol is in the time-saving game state (second). Since it was started during the special time saving state), the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for the time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T16, the stop display of the normal loss special symbol is started, and at the timing of T17, when the stop time N of the normal loss special symbol (0.5 seconds for normal loss) elapses, the customer is in a waiting state. Regardless of whether or not, the time saving state ends and the normal game state is started, the right-handed indicator 67 is turned off, and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. In addition, since the game is in the normal game state, the counting of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

Further, at the timing of T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the normal symbol that becomes a hit is started. Since this variation display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), it is performed with a relatively long normal map variation pattern for the non-time saving state.

Further, at the timing of T18, the stop display of the normal loss special symbol is started, and at T19, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for normal loss) of the normal loss special symbol elapses, the special symbol that becomes normal loss becomes normal. The variable display is started. In addition, the stop display of the normal symbol is started.

Then, at the timing of T20, when the stop time of the normal symbol elapses, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the normal game state, the second opening time is short for the non-time saving state. The starting port 47 will be opened.

Here, an example is shown in which the second special time saving state is started during the variable display of the normal symbol, but even when the second special time saving state occurs during the stop display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, From the next variation display of the normal symbol, the variation display by the relatively short normal symbol variation pattern for the time saving state will be performed.

Further, although the example in which the second special time saving state ends during the execution of the auxiliary game is shown, even if the second special time saving state ends during the variable display of the normal symbol or the stop display of the normal symbol, the second special time saving state ends. From the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to be executed next, the fluctuation display by the relatively short normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time saving state will be performed.

In this way, as a result of the variation display of the special symbol that becomes the specified number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the normal loss special symbol is displayed. When the stop display is displayed, a second special time saving state, which is advantageous to the player, occurs (starts) regardless of whether or not the player is waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented playability that a time saving state occurs even though the game is lost, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the normal loss special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) , It is designed to stop and display for a longer time than the normal stop time. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the second special time saving state will occur due to the length of the stop time, and the time for producing the occurrence of the second special time saving state can be secured. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed. When (stop time elapses), the second special time saving state occurs (starts) and the right-handed indicator 67 lights up. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the occurrence of the second special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed. When (stop time elapses), the second special time saving state occurs (starts) and the aggregation of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal medium outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped, that is, the second special The calculation of the number of payouts during normal times and the number of outs during normal times is continued until just before the time saving state occurs. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal outs for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value are continued, so that the display is displayed. It is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game), the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed (stop time). (Elapsed), the second special time saving state is generated (started) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the second special time saving state occurs during the variable display of the normal symbol, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol is relatively short for the time saving state. The fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern in the figure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the middle due to the occurrence of the second special time saving state.

In addition, when the second special time saving state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display of the next normal symbol is changed to the relatively short normal symbol variation pattern for the time saving state, and the next auxiliary game is performed. Therefore, the second starting port 47 is opened with a long opening time for a short time state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the second special time saving state.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol which is the final round (600th time) in the second special time saving state, the second special time saving state which is advantageous to the player ends. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to secure a profit balance between the game store side and the player side and provide the player with an unprecedented game property of the second special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol which is the final inning (600th inning) in the second special time saving state, the second special time saving state ends and the right-handed display is displayed. 67 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage in connection with the end of the second special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol which is the final round (600th time) in the second special time saving state, the second special time saving state ends and the normal base value is set. The totaling of the number of normal payouts and the number of normal medium outs for calculation is restarted, that is, the calculation of the number of normal middle payouts and the number of normal medium outs is restarted from the end of the second special time saving state. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the special symbol which is the final inning (600th inning) in the second special time saving state, the second special time saving state ends and the advantageous state signal is displayed. The output is stopped. Therefore, the advantageous state signal can be accurately output over the period of the advantageous state, and the state of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped externally.

In addition, when the second special time saving state ends during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, it is relatively long for the non-time saving state from the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed. Fluctuations are displayed according to the fluctuation pattern of the normal map. Therefore, when the second special time saving state is completed, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the way, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, when the second special time saving state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, the variation display of the next normal symbol is changed to the relatively long normal symbol variation pattern for the time saving state, and the next auxiliary game is performed. The second starting port 47 is opened in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by eliminating the need for complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol or the control of the auxiliary game in the middle due to the occurrence of the second special time saving state.

In addition, even if the special loss (time reduction) is won during the second special time reduction state, if the first special time reduction state is not newly generated, the special loss special will be displayed in the final variation display in the second special time reduction state. Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special time saving state ends. Therefore, the right-handed display 67 is turned off, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped, and the normal base value is calculated. Counting of the number of medium payouts and the number of normal medium outs is resumed.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears 0) the entire RWM area (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step E6, all interrupts are permitted.

The sub CPU 130a performs the sub random number update process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130 m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs the timer update process in step E200. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary for executing the effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in step E300. Specifically, the process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting control process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not executed, and the customer. Based on the elapse of the waiting time, a process for executing a customer waiting effect for stimulating the player's motivation to play is performed.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs an operation effect execution process. Specifically, a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 is executed during the valid period that occurs during the variable effect, and the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period is set. In response to the suggesting operation notice effect and the operation of the effect button 17 during this valid period, a decision success effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed or a decision failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is performed. Performs processing for executing an operation effect such as an operation decision effect.

The "operation notice effect" includes a line notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the type of cut-in image displayed on the image display device. Examples include a cut-in notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed depending on the display mode.

The sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode update process in step E600. Specifically, the effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the main display device 70 (first image display device), the sub display device 71 (second image display device), and the like are defined. It is determined whether or not the update condition of the effect mode (effect stage) to be performed is satisfied, and when the update condition is satisfied, a process for updating the effect mode to any of a plurality of effect modes is performed. The details of the effect mode update process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E700. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a command has been received. When the command is received, the process is moved to step E302, and when the command is not received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E303, and if it is not a setting change specification command, the process is transferred to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation specification command, the process is transferred to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs the setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If it is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is moved to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process is moved to step E308.

In step E307, the sub CPU 130a performs the power ON notification process. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power recovery designation command. If this is the case, the process of setting the notification instruction command for executing the power recovery notification described above in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable). A process for executing an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the panel lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, or the like is performed.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error-type designation command, the process is moved to step E309, and if it is not an error-type designation command, the process is moved to step E310.

"Error system specification command" includes non-recoverable error specification command, illegal winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door opening error start specification command, door opening error end specification. Includes commands, operation error specification commands, full error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error specification command (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification) , Full error notification, etc.), the notification command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E311. If it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, a process of updating the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the game state corresponding to the game state designation command is performed.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of updating the special figure hold number stored in the sub RAM 130c and setting an effect instruction command for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. conduct. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a look-ahead designation command. If it is a look-ahead designation command, set the received look-ahead designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) in the look-ahead storage area described later in the sub RAM 130c, and then move to step E315. If it is not a look-ahead designation command, The process is transferred to step E318.

The "look-ahead storage area" sequentially stores the first look-ahead storage unit for sequentially storing the look-ahead information (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, etc.) based on the first look-ahead designation command, and the hold information based on the second look-ahead designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing, and a storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) during execution, and the first look-ahead storage unit and the first The two look-ahead storage units are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the first Look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to one hold number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a younger number each time the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area described above, respectively, and when the second look-ahead designation command is received, the second look-ahead storage unit is assigned. 2 Look-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a younger number each time the variation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special figure determination information execution storage area, and is the first storage unit of the first look-ahead storage unit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage section of the second look-ahead section is stored. NS.

In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect determination process. Specifically, it is expected that a special game will be executed by displaying the hold icon displayed on the image display device or the icon in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon). Processes are performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect that suggests the degree (possibility), the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed, and the like.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a light emission effect determination process at the time of winning. Specifically, when the game ball is awarded to the starting port, the top lamp 10b in the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is made to emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode. Performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the light emitting effect at the time of winning, which suggests the degree of expectation that is executed, and the effect mode of the light emitting effect at the time of winning to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process. Specifically, it is expected that the jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols (suggesting the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed). Whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect (look-ahead operation effect, look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect, etc.), the type of continuous advance notice effect to be executed, and the like are determined and set in the sub RAM 130c.

In the "look-ahead operation effect", a special game is executed by executing an operation effect (notice effect) for operating the second movable member 74 in a predetermined mode at a timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or a plurality of variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation.

"Look-ahead effect effect" is a special game by executing an effect effect (notice effect) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the effect symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that will be executed.

The "look-ahead vibration effect" is the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration effect (notice effect) that vibrates the effect button 17 in a predetermined mode at a timing immediately after the start of the variation effect in one or more variation effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests.

The "look-ahead zone effect" continuously suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing an in-zone effect (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a production to do.

The icon change effect, the light emission effect at the time of winning, and the continuous advance notice effect are pre-reading effects executed based on the result of the preliminary determination of the special figure determination information.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs the symbol data determination process in step E319. Specifically, a process is performed to determine an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variation effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step E325.

In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs the variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device, is determined, and the effect showing the variation effect pattern is determined. The process of setting the instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

In step E322, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot notice effect determination process. Specifically, whether or not to execute the jackpot notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (expected that the jackpot game will be executed) based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E321. Alternatively, the effect mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and the execution information of the jackpot advance notice effect is set in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon display mode update process in step E323. Specifically, a process for starting the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, or changing the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon is performed.

In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs the continuous advance notice effect execution process. Specifically, a process is performed in which an effect instruction command for starting the continuous advance notice effect determined in the continuous advance notice effect determination process in step E317 or changing the effect mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the continuous advance notice effect is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special symbol confirmation command. If it is a special symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step E326, and if it is not a special symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step E327.

In step E326, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, a process is performed in which an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the temporarily stopped state and ending the variable effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for ending the variation effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a special game system designated command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process is transferred to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the process is transferred to step E329.

The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small hit opening designation command, a small hit ending designation command, and the like.

In step E328, the sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the jackpot game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the round specification command. To determine the round effect of the round game and set the effect instruction command for executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and in the case of the ending designation command, determine the ending effect of the jackpot game. Then, the effect instruction command for executing the ending effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed.

In step E329, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a time saving number system designation command. If it is a time saving number system designation command, the process is moved to step E330, and if it is not a time saving number system designation command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step E330, the sub CPU 130a performs the time saving related information notification process. Specifically, a process is performed in which the time reduction number specified by the received time reduction number designation command is stored, and the remaining time reduction number instruction command corresponding to the time reduction number is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the remaining number of time reductions is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for displaying the remaining number of time reductions is performed.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process is moved to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the look-ahead designation command received this time is not executed. The process is transferred to step E315-6.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" means that the jackpot game is not being executed, and when the first look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is received, it is in a non-time saving state (normal game state). That is, when the second look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the second starting port 47 is received, it is in the time saving state (probability variation game state or time saving game state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), and step E315-4. In, the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 40) for determining the icon final display mode is selected. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E315-5. Specifically, referring to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of icons are based on the type of the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from the final display modes.

In step E315-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (white icon), which is a normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes the icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-8, and if the display mode is not for executing the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E315-11.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 41) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the final disappearance of the icon. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. One change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is a display mode of the icon first displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device) from the determined change scenario, and the winning icon. Set the icon display command of to the transmission buffer, and end the icon change effect determination process this time.

As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or a predetermined one. A sound effect (first winning sound when displayed with a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed with a special icon) may be output.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command is displayed on the main display device 70 (first image display device), or a predetermined one. A sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 40 is an icon final display mode determination table for determining the icon final display mode in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of special symbol corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the final icon to be selected The display modes are associated with each other, and as a reference, the effect contents of the scheduled fluctuation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead designation command are described.

The final display mode of the icon includes a normal icon (a white icon whose shape is set for each production mode) that does not suggest a jackpot expectation, and a special icon (common to multiple production modes) that suggests a jackpot expectation. The shape blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) is set. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit related to the special icon is higher in the order of blue icon <red icon (SP reach or higher confirmed) <rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the chance effect is higher than the case where the result of the pre-judgment specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a normal loss in which a normal fluctuation or a shortened fluctuation is executed. In the case of the special loss (time reduction) to be executed, it is easier to determine the special icon as the final display mode of the icon, that is, the icon change effect is more likely to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the first special time saving state will occur due to a special loss (time saving), and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the chance effect is executed as compared with the case where the result of the preliminary determination specified by the scheduled variation pattern is a normal loss in which the normal reach effect is executed. In the case of a special loss (time reduction), it is easier to determine the special icon as the final display mode of the icon, that is, it is easier to execute the icon change effect. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the first special time saving state will occur due to a special loss (time saving), and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the chance effect is executed as compared with the case where the result of the preliminary determination specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a normal loss in which the chance effect is executed. In the case of a special loss (time reduction), it is easier to determine the special icon as the final display mode of the icon, that is, it is easier to execute the icon change effect. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the first special time saving state will occur due to a special loss (time saving), and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 40 is a special loss (time reduction) in which the chance effect is executed as compared with the case where the result of the preliminary determination specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a big hit. In this case, it is more difficult to determine a special icon as the icon display mode, that is, it is difficult to execute the icon change effect. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss in the case of a special loss (shortening of time) without a big hit despite the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

It should be noted that the special icon may be more easily determined as the final icon display mode in the case where the result of the preliminary determination specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a special loss (time reduction) than in the case where the result is a normal loss. In this way, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the first special time saving state will occur due to a special loss (time saving), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a special icon (for example, a character icon, an item icon, etc.) dedicated to a special loss (time saving) may be provided, and in this case, the special icon is more difficult to determine than the blue icon (decision). It may be done less) or vice versa. In addition, when a special icon is provided, it may be determined not only for a special loss (time saving) but also for a normal loss. In this case, the special loss is more than the normal loss. This may make it easier for the special icon to be determined (the rate of determination is higher), or vice versa.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 41 is a change scenario determination table for determining the icon change scenario in the icon change effect determination process of step E315 described above.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, for reference. Preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and how to update the icon in the fluctuations are described.

The "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command. The “variation” is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and an icon display mode that changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the variation (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

The change scenario is determined regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state (icon of the first special symbol) or in the specific game state (icon of the second special symbol). For example, the specific game is determined. In the case of a state (icon of the second special symbol), the rate of change of the icon due to the change is higher than the rate of change of the icon due to the advance change (for example, 20:80 or 0: 100). You may. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the fluctuation is higher in the specific game state (icon of the second special symbol) than in the case of the normal game state (icon of the first special symbol). You may.

(Continuous notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
A continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a read-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the process is moved to step E317-2, and when the look-ahead designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the pre-reading designation command received, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the present is the feasible period of the continuous advance notice effect. If it is the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect (pre-reading operation effect, look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead vibration effect, look-ahead zone effect described above), the process is moved to step E317-4, and if it is not the executable period of the continuous advance notice effect. In step E317-16, it is assumed that the continuous advance notice effect based on the pre-reading designation command received this time is not executed.

The "executable period of the continuous advance notice effect" means that there is nothing to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the look-ahead designation command based on the winning of the first starting port 45 is received. In that case, it is a normal game state, and when a pre-reading designation command based on winning a prize in the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the continuous advance notice type determination table (see FIG. 43), and in step E317-5, refers to the continuous advance notice type determination table and refers to the continuous advance notice type (whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed). , The type of continuous notice effect to be executed) is determined. The details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a continuous advance notice type that executes the continuous advance notice effect. When the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E317-16, and when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, a continuous advance notice scenario determination table (not shown) is selected in step E317-7.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead operation effect is determined. When the look-ahead operation effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E317-10, and when the look-ahead operation effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead operation effect is referred to in step E317-9 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E317-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead effect effect is determined. If the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, the process is moved to step E317-12, and if the look-ahead effect effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead effect effect is referred to in step E317-11 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead vibration effect is determined. When the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed, the process is transferred to step E317-14, and when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the advance notice scenario of the look-ahead vibration effect is referred to in step E317-13 with reference to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table. Is determined and set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E317-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice type for executing the look-ahead zone effect is determined. If the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and if the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the look-ahead zone effect is performed by referring to the continuous advance notice scenario determination table in step E317-15. The advance notice scenario is determined, set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and the continuous advance notice effect determination process of this time is completed.

In step E317-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario (notice scenario indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed) of the continuous notice effect, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the continuous notice effect this time. The decision process ends.

The advance notice scenario or non-notice scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c is referred to in the continuous advance notice effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the continuous advance notice effect or the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Processing is performed to prevent it.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table referred to for determining the continuous notice type.

As shown in FIG. 43, the continuous advance notice type determination table is associated with a look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), a selection rate (%) of each continuous advance notice type, and a continuous advance notice type to be selected. The types are "non-execution" that does not execute continuous advance notice effect, "look-ahead operation effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous advance notice effect, "look-ahead effect effect", "look-ahead vibration effect", and "look-ahead vibration effect". "Zone effect", "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect", and "look-ahead operation effect & look-ahead zone effect" in which two of a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects are executed are provided.

For example, when the look-ahead designation command (scheduled fluctuation pattern) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined in 85%, "look-ahead effect effect" is determined in 5%, and so on. 4% determines "look-ahead motion effect", 3% determines "look-ahead vibration effect", 2% determines "look-ahead zone effect", and 1% determines "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect". Will be done.

The first feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the result of the preliminary determination specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is continuous when it is a special loss (time reduction) than when it is a normal loss. The point that the advance notice production is easy to be executed can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the first special time saving state will occur due to a special loss (time saving), and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the case of special loss (time reduction) is more continuous notice than the case where the result of the preliminary judgment specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a big hit. There is a point that it is difficult to perform the production. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss in the case of a special loss (shortening of time) without a big hit despite the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, it is a normal loss in which a reach effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation such as SPSP reach effect or SP reach effect is executed, as compared with the case where the result of the preliminary judgment specified by the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a special loss (time reduction). In some cases, the continuous advance notice effect may be more easily executed. In this way, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the reach effect, which has a relatively high jackpot expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Production mode update process of the production control unit)
The effect mode update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the effect mode update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E600-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the jackpot game has shifted to the probabilistic game state. If it has not shifted to the probabilistic gaming state, the process is transferred to step E600-3, and if it has shifted to the probabilistic gaming state, the production mode K1 is set as a new production mode in step E600-2, and the step The process is transferred to E600-14. The effect mode K1 is the probabilistic initial mode that is first set when shifting to the probabilistic gaming state.

In step E600-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the jackpot game has shifted to the time-saving game state (normal time-saving state). If it has not shifted to the time-saving game state (normal time-saving state), the process is transferred to step E600-4, and if it has shifted to the time-saving game state (normal time-saving state), the process is transferred to step E600-5.

In step E600-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) has shifted to the time saving gaming state (first special time saving state, second special time saving state). If it has not shifted to the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state, second special time-saving state), the process is transferred to step E600-6, and the time-saving game state (first special time-saving state, second special time-saving state) If the process shifts to step E600-5, the process proceeds to step E600-5.

In step E600-5, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect mode J1 as a new effect mode, and shifts the process to step E600-14. The effect mode J1 is the time saving initial mode that is first set when shifting to the time saving game state (normal time saving state, first special time saving state, second special time saving state).

In step E600-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the time-saving gaming state (normal time-saving state, first special time-saving state, second special time-saving state) has shifted to the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state). If it has not shifted to the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to step E600-8, and if it has shifted to the normal gaming state, the effect mode T0 is set as a new effect mode in step E600-7, and the step The process is transferred to E600-14. The effect mode T0 is a dedicated effect mode after the time reduction when the time reduction game state is changed to the normal game state, and the effect mode is the case where the time reduction state is changed to the normal time reduction state or the first special time reduction state is changed. It is set regardless of whether it is or the transition from the second special time saving state.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E600-8 whether or not the variation effect has been started. If the variable effect has not been started, the current effect mode update process is terminated assuming that the effect mode is not updated, and if the variable effect is started, the current effect mode is set in step E600-9. The mode stay counter for counting the number of fluctuation effects executed in is updated by +1.

In step E600-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the value of the mode stay counter is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 10). If it is not larger than the predetermined value, the effect mode update process is terminated as if the effect mode is not updated, and if it is larger than the predetermined value, the process is moved to step E600-11.

The sub CPU 130a executes the mode change lottery process in step E600-11. Specifically, a mode change random value is acquired, and the mode change random value is collated with a mode change lottery table (not shown) to draw a lottery as to whether or not to update the effect mode.

In step E600-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the mode change lottery has been won. If the mode change lottery has not been won, the production mode update process is terminated assuming that the production mode is not updated, and if the mode change lottery is won, the current game in step E600-13. Determine and set a different production mode that corresponds to the state. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, any of the effect modes T1 to T3 is determined, in the probabilistic gaming state, any of the effect modes K1 to K2 is determined, and in the time-saving gaming state, any of the effect modes K1 to K2 is determined. One of the production modes J1 to J2 is determined.

Since the effect mode was updated in step E600-14, the sub CPU 130a clears the value of the mode stay counter to 0, sets the effect mode update command in the transmission buffer in step E600-15, and performs the effect mode update process this time. To finish. As a result, the effect mode update command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the effect corresponding to the effect mode update command is executed.

In this way, when the time-saving game state is changed to the normal game state, regardless of whether the time-saving game state is the normal time-saving state, the first special time-saving state, or the second special time-saving state, it is dedicated after the time-saving. The effect mode T0, which is a mode, is set. Therefore, it is possible to surely inform the player that the time-saving game state has ended without the player being aware of which type of time-saving state the normal game state has changed from, and to improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

(Example of production when a normal time saving condition occurs)
FIG. 45 is an example of an effect in which a jackpot game is executed in a normal game state and a normal time saving state occurs.

First, as shown in FIG. 45A, the effect mode T1 is set according to the normal gaming state, and the mode T1 background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed. In addition, the lost effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (composed of the number image SG, the character image CG, and the symbol effect image ZE) corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the lost special symbol TZ is displayed. It is assumed that it is displayed in a specific mode (numerical image + small size). Further, since the first hold number is "3", "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and the red icon, the white icon, and the blue icon are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. There is. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is output at an audible volume.

Then, when the first reserved number is subtracted to "2" and the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is started, the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "2" as shown in FIG. 45 (b). At the same time as being updated, the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started, and further, the variable effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "8" to start the normal reach effect. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is muted and the normal reach BGM is audibly output.

Further, when the normal reach effect time elapses, the development effect is executed, and the SP reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 45 (d). At this time, the effect symbol 70a is switched to the second display mode (numerical image SG only) and reducedly displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B is hidden together with the white icon and the blue icon. Further, the SP reach BGM is audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM.

After that, when the SP reach effect time elapses, the development effect is executed, and the SPSP reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 45 (e). At this time, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a minimum in the upper left corner of the screen in the second display mode, and the icon display area 70C is hidden together with the red icon. Further, the SPSP reach BGM is audibly output instead of the SP reach BGM.

Then, as a result of executing the above-mentioned operation decision effect at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, when the decision success effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a returned to the normal size is temporarily stopped in the jackpot mode "888". After that, when an eye-catching effect (an effect of displaying an image that shields the effect symbol 70a and then erasing it) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a becomes the first. It returns to the display mode. Further, the red icon is redisplayed in the icon display area 70C, and the white icon and the blue icon are redisplayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. The output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped from the time when the operation determination effect is executed.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses and the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped in the jackpot mode (“888”), and the jackpot special symbol is stopped. The red icon redisplayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the opening screen is displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are erased, and the first hold icon display area 70B is white. The icon and the blue icon are hidden, and the right-handed notification for instructing right-handed is executed. Specifically, the right-handed large image MUD and the right-handed small image MUS are displayed, and the sound of "right-handed!" Is output. In addition, the opening effect BGM is audibly output. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the right-handed large image MUD is erased. The right-handed large image MUD, the right-handed small image MUS, and the sound of "right-handed!" Are common ones that do not depend on the gaming state when suggesting right-handed.

Further, when the round game is started, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the round effect screen is displayed, and the round effect BGM is audibly output instead of the opening effect BGM. After that, round games and intervals are repeated until the final round.

Then, when the final round game is completed and the ending is started, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), the ending effect is displayed and the ending is displayed while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are not displayed. BGM is audibly output. In addition, a normal time saving rush effect for notifying (suggesting) that the normal time saving state is started and a warning effect for alerting the player are executed.

Specifically, in the normal time saving rush effect, the character image of "time saving rushing" is displayed and the sound of "time saving rushing!" Is output. In the alerting effect, the first alerting image NB of "Please be careful about getting absorbed" to alert you not to be too absorbed in the game, and the memory that the valuable value of the player is stored by pressing the return button 20b. The second warning image CB of "Be careful not to forget to remove the card" is displayed to call attention to forgetting to remove the medium (IC card, etc.).

After that, when the ending is completed and the normal time saving state is started with the hold memory, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the effect mode J1 corresponding to the time saving state is set and the mode J1 background image is displayed. Will be done. In addition, the effect symbol 70a of the second display mode composed of numerical images and the special symbol TZ of the specific mode are redisplayed, and the remaining number of times NK (here, 100 times), which is the number of variable displays that can be executed in the normal time saving state. Is displayed. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B (including the white icon and the blue icon) corresponding to the first hold on the non-priority side maintains the non-display state due to the time saving state, and becomes the second hold on the priority side. The corresponding second hold icon display area 70D is displayed. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is output at an audible volume.

Then, since the second hold number is "0" at the start of the normal time saving state, when the first hold number is subtracted to "1" and the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the first hold number is started. The display area 70E is updated to "1". Further, the hold icon is not shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C (what was a white icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is a white icon. Is displayed. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "99 times".

After that, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time elapses, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped and redisplayed in the icon display area 70C. The white icon is erased. Then, if the second reserved number remains "0", the first reserved number is subtracted to "0" to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first reserved number display area 70E is "0". Will be updated to. Further, the hold icon is not shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C (the blue icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is a white icon). Is displayed. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "98 times".

On the other hand, if there is a second hold number at the start of the normal time saving state, the second hold number is subtracted without subtracting the first hold number, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Then, the second hold number display area 70F is updated by subtracting one, and the shift display of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area toward the icon display area 70C is started. Is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display.

Here, an example in which there is a hold memory at the start of the normal time saving state shifted from the jackpot game is shown, but in the case of a customer waiting state where there is no hold memory, the first hold number display in FIG. 45 (j) is displayed. The state in which the area 70E is set to "0" is maintained, and when the predetermined time elapses, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is muted. Furthermore, when the predetermined time elapses, the customer waiting demonstration production is started.

In this way, when the normal time saving state is generated, the normal time saving rush effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a normal time saving state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time saving state is generated, the right-handed notification (display of the right-handed small image MUS) is performed before the normal time-saving state occurs (the right-handed small image MUS is not newly performed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to hitting the left side when a normal time saving state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time saving state is generated, the effect mode J1 corresponding to the time saving state is set according to the ending of the jackpot game regardless of whether or not there is a hold memory, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed. It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the time saving state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time saving state is generated, the normal time saving rush effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ hidden. Therefore, it is possible to digest the time saving state with a new mood without worrying about the result of the previous fluctuation production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time saving state is generated, a warning effect (display of the first warning image NB, display of the second warning image CB) for alerting the player is performed, and then the time saving state is met. The effect (change of background image, display of remaining number of times NK, right-handed notification, variable effect according to time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to effect mode J1, etc.) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively alert the player.

Further, at the start of the normal time saving state, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 for the time saving state is audibly output even in the customer waiting state where there is no hold memory, but it is muted when a predetermined period elapses. The audible output is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the production is drastically reduced even in the waiting state where there is no hold memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the customer is waiting at the start of the normal time saving state after shifting from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 may be audibly output when the hold memory is generated by the game ball winning a prize at the start port from the customer waiting state and the variable effect is started.

In addition, although the alerting effect is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the alerting effect may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game to the normal time saving state, or immediately after the start of the normal time saving state ( The alert effect may be performed during the first variable effect), or the first alert image NB and the second alert image CB may be displayed in order in the alert effect (whichever comes first). May be displayed in).

(Example of production when the normal time saving state ends)
FIG. 46 is an example of an effect when the normal time saving state generated after the end of the jackpot game ends.

First, it is assumed that the effect mode J2 is set according to the time-saving game state, the mode J2 background image corresponding to the effect mode J2 is displayed, and the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J2 is audibly output. Further, since the second hold number is "3", it is assumed that "3" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F and three white icons are displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D. ..

Here, when the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started in which the second hold number is subtracted to "2" and the number of time reductions remains three times, the second hold is as shown in FIG. 46 (a). The number display area 70F is updated to "2", and the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "3 times". At this time, a countdown effect (emphasis effect) that emphasizes the remaining number of time reductions is started over the variable effect that is the final inning of the time reduction state. Specifically, since the number of remaining time reductions is 3, the "remaining 3" image is displayed and the "3" sound is output.

After that, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the second reserved number increases to "3", the second reserved number display area 70F is updated to "3" and the second reserved icon display area 70D is white. An additional icon is displayed.

Further, when the variable time elapses and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped in the lost mode (“582”), and the said The white icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Then, when the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started in which the second reserved number is subtracted to "2" and the number of time reductions remains two times, the second reserved number is as shown in FIG. 46 (c). The display area 70F is updated to "2", and the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "2 times". At this time, as a countdown effect, the "remaining 2" image is displayed and the sound of "2" is output.

After that, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the second reserved number increases to "3", the second reserved number display area 70F is updated to "3" and the second reserved icon display area 70D is white. An additional icon is displayed.

Further, when the variable time elapses and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped in the lost mode (“339”), and the said The white icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Then, when the loss variation display of the second special symbol is started in which the second reserved number is subtracted to "2" and the number of time reductions is one remaining, the second reserved number is as shown in FIG. 46 (e). The display area 70F is updated to "2", and the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "1 time". At this time, as a countdown effect, the "remaining 1" image is displayed and the sound of "1" is output.

After that, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 and the second reserved number increases to "3", the second reserved number display area 70F is updated to "3" and the second reserved icon display area 70D is white. An additional icon is displayed.

Further, when the variable time elapses and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped in the lost mode (“582”), and the said The white icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Then, when the loss variation display (result variation effect) of the second special symbol in which the second reserved number is subtracted to "2" and the number of time reductions remains 0 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (g). , The second hold number display area 70F is updated to "2", and the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "0". At this time, as a countdown effect, the "last" image is displayed and the "last" sound is output.

When a predetermined time elapses from that time, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the icon TI of the icon display area 70C and the hold icon HI of the second hold icon display area 70D are hidden, and the above-mentioned result display is displayed. Is done. Specifically, the result background image is displayed, and the characters "game result" indicating that the result is a series of advantageous sections, the characters "BONUS x 2" indicating the number of jackpots in the series of advantageous sections, and "TOTAL 2500pt" indicating the total number of payouts (total number of winning balls) based on winning to the winning openings excluding the starting opening in the series of advantageous sections is displayed, and further, as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the current set value. The setting suggestion image SS including the characters "kichi" is displayed. Further, instead of the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J2, the BGM corresponding to the result display is audibly output.

Then, when the result display is completed, the effect symbol 70a which is a normal size and has returned to the first display mode is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped in the lost mode (“481”), and the icon TI and the icon TI of the icon display area 70C and the icon display area 70C are displayed. The hold icon HI of the second hold icon display area 70D is redisplayed. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the result display is not output.

Then, when the variable time elapses and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 46 (i), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped in the lost mode (“481”), and the said The white icon redisplayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses and the normal game state is started, the effect mode T0, which is an effect mode dedicated to the time saving, is set, and the mode T0 background image corresponding to the effect mode T0 is displayed. Further, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 is audibly output.

Further, when the first reserved number is subtracted to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the second reserved number display area 70F is updated to "1" as shown in FIG. 46 (j). At the same time, the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the left-handed notification for instructing the left-handed is executed. Specifically, the left-handed large image HUD is displayed, and the voice of "left-handed!" Is audibly output. It should be noted that the left-handed large image HUD and the sound of "left-handed!" Are common regardless of which gaming state the normal gaming state is shifted to.

Here, an example in which there is a hold memory (second hold number) at the start of the normal game state is shown, but if there is no hold memory and the customer is in the waiting state, the left-handed notification is not executed. Further, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0, which is audibly output with the start of the normal gaming state, is muted when a predetermined time elapses. If there is no hold memory at the start of the normal game state and the player is in a waiting state, even if the hold memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start opening and the variable effect is executed, the change effect is executed. Left-handed notification is not executed during the fluctuation effect.

As described above, in the normal time saving state, when the remaining number of times in the normal time saving state reaches a predetermined number (here, 3 times), the countdown effect (emphasis effect) for emphasizing the remaining number of times in the normal time saving is executed. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's feeling of frustration at the end of the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time saving state ends, a result display that displays the result of the game in a series of advantageous sections in which the state advantageous to the player continues, triggered by the big hit game from the so-called first hit state. Is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time saving state ends, a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the current set value is executed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an index as to whether or not the player continues the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the normal time saving state ends, the effect symbol 70a is changed from the second display mode (numerical image only) to the first display mode (numerical image SG, character image CG, symbol effect image ZE), while special. The symbol TZ does not change the display mode. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect, and to generate the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, at the start of the normal gaming state transitioned from the normal time saving state, the effect mode T0, which is an effect mode dedicated to the time reduction, is set, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode T0 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continue the game by letting the player know that the time saving state has ended and giving a special feeling that the mode has been shifted to the production mode dedicated to the time saving, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

In addition, at the start of the normal game state that has shifted from the normal time saving state, if there is a hold memory, left-handed notification (display of left-handed large image HUD, audible output of "left-handed!" Voice) is performed. When there is no hold memory and the customer is waiting, the left-handed notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing unnecessary control.

Further, at the start of the normal game state transitioned from the normal time saving state, even in the customer waiting state where there is no hold memory, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 dedicated to the time saving is audibly output, but it is predetermined. When the period elapses, it is muted (audible output is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the production is drastically reduced even in the waiting state where there is no hold memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the customer is waiting at the start of the normal game state after shifting from the normal time saving state, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 may be audibly output when the hold memory is generated by the game ball winning a prize at the start port from the customer waiting state and the variable effect is started. Further, left-handed notification (display of left-handed large image HUD, audible output of "left-handed!" Voice) may be performed.

(Example of production when the first special time saving state occurs)
FIG. 47 is an example of an effect in which a special loss (time reduction) is won in a normal game state and a first special time reduction state occurs.

First, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the effect mode T1 is set according to the normal gaming state, and the mode T1 background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed. In addition, the lost effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (composed of the numerical image SG, the character image CG, and the symbol effect image ZE), and the lost special symbol TZ is displayed in a specific mode (numerical image +). It is assumed that it is displayed in small size). Further, since the first hold number is "3", "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and two blue icons and one red icon are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. ing. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is output at an audible volume.

Then, when the first reserved number is subtracted to "2" and the special loss (time reduction) variation display of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the first reserved number display area 70E is displayed. At the same time as being updated to "2", the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started, and further, the variable effect (chance variable effect) is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are changed. To start.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at "8" to start the normal reach effect. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is muted and the normal reach BGM is audibly output.

Further, when the normal reach effect time elapses, the development effect is executed, and the chance effect is started as shown in FIG. 47 (d). The effect symbol 70a is switched to the second display mode (numerical image SG only) and is reduced and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a roulette display in which a plurality of special effect symbols are swiveled is performed. At this time, the chance effect BGM is audibly output instead of the normal reach BGM.

In addition, a "BONUS" symbol, which is a jackpot effect symbol that suggests a big hit, a "help time" symbol that suggests that a special time saving state occurs, and an SP reach effect are executed for a plurality of special effect symbols. It includes a "SP" symbol that suggests that, and a "miss" symbol that is a normal loss effect symbol that suggests that it will be lost. It should be noted that the number and types of special effect symbols that are swiveled differ depending on the type of special effect symbol displayed as a result of the roulette display.

Then, as a result of the roulette display, the "help time" symbol is temporarily stopped, and an eye-catching effect (an effect of displaying an image that shields the effect symbol 70a and then erasing it) suggesting that the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed is performed. When executed, the left and right effect symbols 70a are displayed in the first display mode in a state of being temporarily stopped in a normal size so as to sandwich the "help time" symbol. At this time, the chance production BGM is muted.

Then, when the fluctuation time elapses and the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), the first special time saving rush / exit, which is the reach loss mode including the "help time" symbol in the center. (Special loss effect symbol) causes the effect symbol 70a to stop, and the first special time-saving entry / exit, which is the reach loss mode in which the middle symbol is "0", causes the special symbol TZ to stop, and the icon display area 70C is reached. The displayed blue icon disappears.

Then, when the stop time of the special loss special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 47 (f), the effect symbol 70a and the first hold icon display area 70B are hidden together with the white icon and the blue icon. While the symbol TZ is displayed, the special time saving rush effect for notifying (suggesting) that the special time saving state (here, the first special time saving state) is started is executed. In the special time saving rush effect, the character image of "help time rush" is displayed and the voice of "help time rush" is output. However, unlike the normal execution of the time-saving rush effect, the jackpot game is not used, so the attention-calling effect for alerting the player is not performed.

After that, when the stop time of the special loss special symbol elapses and the first special time saving state is started with the hold memory, as shown in FIG. 47 (g), the effect mode J1 is set according to the time saving state. Then, the mode J1 background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ of the second display mode composed of numerical images are redisplayed, and the remaining number of times NK (here, 200 times), which is the number of variable displays that can be executed in the first special time saving state, is set. Is displayed. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B (including the blue icon and the red icon) corresponding to the first hold on the non-priority side maintains the non-display state due to the time saving state, and becomes the second hold on the priority side. The corresponding second hold icon display area 70D is displayed.

Further, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is output at an audible volume, and the right-handed notification for instructing the right-handed is executed. Specifically, a right-handed large image MUD and a right-handed small image MUS suggesting right-handedness are displayed, and the sound of "right-handed!" Is audibly output. The right-handed large image MUD, the right-handed small image MUS, and the sound of "right-handed!" Are common ones that do not depend on the gaming state when suggesting right-handed.

Then, since the second hold number is "0" at the start of the first special time saving state, when the first hold number is subtracted to "1" and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started, the figure is shown. As shown in 47 (h), the first reserved number display area 70E is updated to "1". Further, the hold icon is not shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C (the blue icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is a white icon). Is displayed.

Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "199 times". Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the right-handed large image MUD is erased. Even if the continuous advance notice effect is in the middle before the occurrence of the first special time saving state, the continuous advance notice effect will end.

After that, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time elapses, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped and redisplayed in the icon display area 70C. The white icon is erased. Then, if the second reserved number remains "0", the first reserved number is subtracted to "0" to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first reserved number display area 70E is "0". Will be updated to. Further, the hold icon is not shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C (the red icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is a white icon. Is displayed. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "198 times".

On the other hand, if there is a second hold number at the start of the first special time saving state, the second hold number is subtracted without subtracting the first hold number, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Then, the second hold number display area 70F is updated by subtracting one, and the shift display of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area toward the icon display area 70C is started. Is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display.

Here, an example in which there is a hold memory at the start of the first special time saving state is shown, but in the case of a customer waiting state where there is no hold memory, the first hold number display area 70E is "0" and the right. Right-handed notification is performed in which the small-sized image MUS is displayed (the display of the large right-handed image MUD and the audio output of "right-handed!" Are not executed).

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is muted. In addition, in the case of a customer waiting state in which there is no hold memory at the start of the first special time saving state, even if the hold memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start port and the variable effect is executed. , The display of the right-handed large image MUD and the voice output of "right-handed!" Of the right-handed notification are not executed during the fluctuation effect.

In this way, when the first special time saving state is generated, the special losing effect symbol (the first special time saving entry / exit including the "help time" symbol), which is different from the normal loss effect symbol, is stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the first special time saving state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the first special time saving state is generated, the special time saving rushing effect is executed after the stop display (during the stop display) of the special loss effect symbol (first special time saving rushing / exiting eye). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a special time saving state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special time saving state is generated, right-handed notification (right-handed large image MUD and right-handed right-handed) is given after the stop display (after the stop time has elapsed) of the special loss effect symbol (first special time-saving entry / exit). The small image MUS is displayed and the voice output of "Right-handed!") Is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting the left side when the first special time saving state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special time saving state is generated, the effect mode J1 according to the time saving state is set after the stop display (after the stop time has elapsed) of the special loss effect symbol (first special time saving entry / exit). , The background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the time saving state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the first special time saving state is generated, the background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed in the state where the first special time saving entry / exit (here, the special symbol TZ) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the occurrence of the time saving state by the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the first special time saving state is generated, the special time saving rushing effect is executed with the first special time saving rushing / exiting eye (here, the special symbol TZ) displayed. Therefore, it is possible to generate a time saving state in a state where the player can grasp the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first special time saving state is generated, the time saving state is set without performing the warning effect (displaying the first warning image NB and displaying the second warning image CB) to call the player. Corresponding effects (change of background image, display of remaining number of times NK, right-handed notification, variation effect according to time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to effect mode J1, etc.) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player feels annoyed at the start of the first special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the first special time saving state is generated, the effect symbol 70a is changed from the first display mode (numerical image SG, character image CG, symbol effect image ZE) to the second display mode (numerical image only). The special symbol TZ does not change the display mode. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect, and to generate a time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the start condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied (the winning of the second starting port 47 becomes easy) and the first special time saving state is generated, the first special is not prioritized over the second special symbol. When the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect, etc.) corresponding to the symbol is executed, the execution of the look-ahead effect is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the method of playing the game that is advantageous to the advantageous player can be determined from the look-ahead effect, and it is possible to secure the profit balance between the game store side and the player.

In addition, at the start of the first special time saving state, if there is a hold memory, the right-handed small image MUS and the right-handed large image MUD suggesting right-handedness are displayed, and the voice of "right-handed!" Is heard. When outputting and waiting for customers without special figure hold, the right-handed small image MUS is displayed, while the right-handed large image MUD is not displayed and the sound of "right-handed!" Is not audibly output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing unnecessary control.

Further, at the start of the first special time saving state, the background image corresponding to the effect saving mode J1 for the time saving state is displayed and the effect mode J1 is supported even in the customer waiting state where there is no hold memory. The BGM is audibly output, but the BGM is muted (the audible output is stopped) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the production is drastically reduced even in the waiting state where there is no hold memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the first special time saving entry / exit (special loss production symbol) is set to the reach loss mode including the "help time" symbol, only the "help time" symbol may be used, or the "help time" symbol may be used. It may be a predetermined combination (such as a chance eye with an odd numbered symbol such as "357") that is not included.

In addition, the special time saving rush effect is executed after the stop display of the special loss effect symbol (first special time saving rushing exit), but the special time saving rushing effect is executed after the special loss effect symbol is temporarily stopped. Alternatively, the special time saving rush effect may be executed from the temporary stop of the special loss effect symbol to after the stop display, or the special time saving rush effect may be executed at the start of the variation effect after the occurrence of the special time saving state. You may try to do it.

Further, the special loss effect symbol 70a is hidden, the special time saving rush effect is executed, and then the background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed, but the special loss effect symbol 70a remains visible. , A special time saving rush effect may be executed to display a background image corresponding to the effect mode J1.

Further, when the customer is waiting at the start of the first special time saving state, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 may be audibly output when the hold memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start port from the customer waiting state and the variable effect is started. Alternatively, the right-handed large image MUD may be displayed and the sound of "right-handed!" May be output.

Further, the effect mode may not be switched at the start of the first special time saving state. In this case, if it is not in the customer waiting state, the special time saving rush effect is executed to display the right-handed small image MUS and the right-handed large image MUD image suggesting right-handed, and the BGM corresponding to the effect mode is continued as it is. If the customer is waiting, execute the time saving suggestion effect to display the right-handed small image MUS suggesting right-handedness, continue the BGM corresponding to the effect mode as it is, and mute the BGM when a predetermined time elapses. It may be.

(Example of production when the second special time saving state occurs)
FIG. 48 is an example of an effect in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times in the normal game state and the second special time saving state occurs.

First, as shown in FIG. 48A, the effect mode T1 is set according to the normal gaming state, and the mode T1 background image corresponding to the effect mode T1 is displayed. In addition, the lost effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (composed of the numerical image SG, the character image CG, and the symbol effect image ZE), and the lost special symbol TZ is displayed in a specific mode (numerical image +). It is assumed that it is displayed in small size). Further, since the first hold number is "3", "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and the white icon, the blue icon, and the red icon are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. There is. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is output at an audible volume.

Then, the first hold number is subtracted to "2", and the change of the special symbol becomes the specified number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the change number based on the end of the jackpot game). When the display (displacement display of the first special symbol) is started, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the first hold number display area 70E is updated to "2", and the hold icon is displayed. The shift display toward the area 70C is started, and further, the normal variation effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variation effect.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, and a time reduction suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of a special time reduction state is executed. Specifically, the "help time" symbol, which is a special effect symbol that suggests that a special time saving state occurs in the central effect symbol 70a, scrolls at a low speed, and an effect that encourages whether or not to temporarily stop is performed. It is said.

Then, as a result of the time saving suggestion effect, the "help time" symbol is temporarily stopped, and when the fluctuation time elapses and the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), "O" is displayed in the center. The second special time saving rushing in, which is a losing mode including the "help time" symbol, stops the production symbol 70a due to the second special time saving rushing out (special losing effect symbol), and the second special time saving rushing, which is a losing mode in which the middle symbol is "0". The special symbol TZ is finally stopped by the result, and the white icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Then, when the stop time of the normal loss special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the effect symbol 70a and the first hold icon display area 70B are hidden together with the blue icon and the red icon. While the symbol TZ is displayed, the special time saving rush effect for notifying (suggesting) that the special time saving state (here, the second special time saving state) is started is executed. In the special time saving rush effect, the character image of "help time rush" is displayed and the voice of "help time rush" is output. However, unlike the normal execution of the time-saving rush effect, the jackpot game is not used, so the attention-calling effect for alerting the player is not performed.

After that, when the stop time of the normal loss special symbol elapses and the second special time saving state is started with the hold memory, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), the effect mode J1 is set according to the time saving state. Then, the mode J1 background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ of the second display mode composed of numerical images are redisplayed, and the remaining number of times NK (here, 600 times), which is the number of variable displays that can be executed in the second special time saving state, is set. Is displayed. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B (including the blue icon and the red icon) corresponding to the first hold on the non-priority side maintains the non-display state due to the time saving state, and becomes the second hold on the priority side. The corresponding second hold icon display area 70D is displayed.

Further, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is output at an audible volume, and the right-handed notification for instructing the right-handed is executed. Specifically, a right-handed large image MUD and a right-handed small image MUS suggesting right-handedness are displayed, and the sound of "right-handed!" Is audibly output. The right-handed large image MUD, the right-handed small image MUS, and the sound of "right-handed!" Are common ones that do not depend on the gaming state when suggesting right-handed.

Then, since the second hold number is "0" at the start of the second special time saving state, when the first hold number is subtracted to "1" and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started, the figure is shown. As shown in 48 (g), the first reserved number display area 70E is updated to “1”. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shifting the hold icon from the first hold icon display area 70B (what was a blue icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a white icon). Will be done.

Further, the variable effect is disclosed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "599 times". Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the right-handed large image MUD is erased. Even if the continuous advance notice effect is in the middle before the occurrence of the second special time reduction state, the continuous advance notice effect will end.

After that, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time elapses, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped and redisplayed in the icon display area 70C. The white icon is erased. Then, if the second reserved number remains "0", the first reserved number is subtracted to "0" to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first reserved number display area 70E is "0". Will be updated to. Further, the hold icon is not shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C (the red icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is a white icon. Is displayed. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "598 times".

On the other hand, if there is a second hold number at the start of the first special time saving state, the second hold number is subtracted without subtracting the first hold number, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Then, the second hold number display area 70F is updated by subtracting one, and the shift display of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area toward the icon display area 70C is started. Is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display.

If there is no hold memory at the start of the second special time saving state and there is no hold memory, as shown in FIG. 48 (h), the first hold number display area 70E is "0" and the right side. Right-handed notification is performed in which the small-sized image MUS is displayed (the display of the large right-handed image MUD and the audio output of "right-handed!" Are not executed).

Then, when the predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 48 (i), the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is muted. Furthermore, when the predetermined time elapses, the customer waiting demonstration production is started. If there is no hold memory at the start of the second special time saving state and the player is waiting for a customer, even if the hold memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start opening and the variable effect is executed. , The display of the right-handed large image MUD and the voice output of "right-handed!" Of the right-handed notification are not executed during the fluctuation effect.

In this way, when the second special time saving state is generated, the special losing effect symbol (the second special time saving entry / exit including the "help time" symbol), which is different from the normal loss effect symbol, is stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the second special time saving state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special time saving state is generated, the time saving suggestion effect ("help time" symbol) is displayed before the stop display of the special loss effect symbol (the second special time saving entry / exit including the "help time" symbol). A production that encourages whether or not to temporarily stop) is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for whether or not the second special time saving state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special time reduction state is generated, the special time reduction effect is executed before the stop time of the special loss effect symbol (the second special time reduction entry / exit including the "help time" symbol) elapses. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a special time saving state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special time saving state is generated, right-handed notification (right-handed large image MUD and right-handed right-handed) is given after the stop display (after the stop time has elapsed) of the special loss effect symbol (second special time-saving entry / exit). The small image MUS is displayed and the voice output of "Right-handed!") Is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by hitting the left side when the second special time saving state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special time saving state is generated, the effect mode J1 according to the time saving state is set after the stop display (after the stop time has elapsed) of the special loss effect symbol (second special time saving entry / exit). , The background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the time saving state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second special time saving state is generated, the background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed in the state where the second special time saving entry / exit (here, the special symbol TZ) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the occurrence of the time saving state by the background image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second special time saving state is generated, the special time saving rushing effect is executed with the second special time saving rushing / exiting eye (here, the special symbol TZ) displayed. Therefore, it is possible to generate a time saving state in a state where the player can grasp the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special time saving state is generated, the time saving state is set without performing the warning effect (displaying the first warning image NB and displaying the second warning image CB) to call the player. Corresponding effects (change of background image, display of remaining number of times NK, right-handed notification, variation effect according to time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to effect mode J1, etc.) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player feels annoyed at the start of the second special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second special time saving state is generated, the effect symbol 70a is changed from the first display mode (numerical image SG, character image CG, symbol effect image ZE) to the second display mode (numerical image only). The special symbol TZ does not change the display mode. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect, and to generate a time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the start condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied (the winning of the second start port 47 becomes easy) and the second special time saving state is generated, the first special is not prioritized over the second special symbol. When the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect, etc.) corresponding to the symbol is executed, the execution of the look-ahead effect is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the method of playing the game that is advantageous to the advantageous player can be determined from the look-ahead effect, and it is possible to secure the profit balance between the game store side and the player.

In addition, at the start of the second special time saving state, if there is a hold memory, the right-handed small image MUS and the right-handed large image MUD suggesting right-handedness are displayed, and the voice of "right-handed!" Is heard. When outputting and waiting for customers with no hold memory, the right-handed small image MUS is displayed, while the right-handed large image MUD is not displayed, and the sound of "right-handed!" Is not audibly output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing unnecessary control.

Further, at the start of the second special time saving state, the background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 for the time saving state is displayed even in the customer waiting state where there is no special drawing hold, and the time saving state is displayed. The BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 is audibly output, but the BGM is muted (the audible output is stopped) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the production is drastically reduced even in the waiting state where there is no hold memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, although the second special time saving entry / exit (special loss production symbol) is set to the loss mode including the "help time" symbol, only the "help time" symbol may be used, or the "help time" symbol may be used. It may be a predetermined combination (such as a chance eye with an even numbered symbol such as "248") that is not included.

In addition, although the "help time" symbol was supposed to execute a time saving suggestion effect as to whether or not to temporarily stop, a dedicated time saving suggestion such as displaying a character suggesting the possibility of a special time saving state may occur. You may try to perform the production.

In addition, the special time saving rush effect is executed after the stop display of the special loss effect symbol (second special time saving rushing exit), but the special time saving rushing effect is executed after the special loss effect symbol is temporarily stopped. Alternatively, the special time saving rush effect may be executed from the temporary stop of the special loss effect symbol to after the stop display, or the special time saving rush effect may be executed at the start of the variation effect after the occurrence of the special time saving state. You may try to do it.

Further, the special loss effect symbol 70a is hidden, the special time saving rush effect is executed, and then the background image corresponding to the effect mode J1 is displayed, but the special loss effect symbol 70a remains visible. , A special time saving rush effect may be executed to display a background image corresponding to the effect mode J1.

Further, when the customer is waiting at the start of the second special time saving state, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J1 may be audibly output when the hold memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start port from the customer waiting state and the variable effect is started. Alternatively, the right-handed large image MUD may be displayed and the sound of "right-handed!" May be output.

In addition, the number of fluctuation displays (variation effect) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) to the occurrence of the second special time reduction state is a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). ), The countdown effect suggesting that the second special time saving state occurs may be executed by performing the countdown every time the variation display (variation effect) is executed. In this case, an effect mode different from the count-down effect that emphasizes the number of remaining time reductions (such as different display modes of numbers or audio output of the count value in English) may be used.

In addition, when there is no hold memory at the start of the second special time saving state and the customer is waiting, the output of the BGM corresponding to the original production mode is continued without switching to the production mode J1 and the predetermined time elapses. The BGM may be muted, or the BGM may be muted after the predetermined time elapses by switching to the effect mode J1 but continuing the output of the BGM corresponding to the original effect mode.

Further, the effect mode may not be switched at the start of the second special time saving state. In this case, if it is not in the customer waiting state, the special time saving rush effect is executed to display the right-handed small image MUS and the right-handed large image MUD image suggesting right-handed, and the BGM corresponding to the effect mode is continued as it is. If the customer is waiting, execute the time saving suggestion effect to display the right-handed small image MUS suggesting right-handedness, continue the BGM corresponding to the effect mode as it is, and mute the BGM when a predetermined time elapses. It may be.

(Example of production when the special time saving state ends)
FIG. 49 is an example of the effect when the special time saving state (first special time saving state, second special time saving state) ends.

First, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the effect mode J2 is set according to the time saving game state, the mode J2 background image is displayed, and the BGM corresponding to the effect mode J2 is audibly output. do. Further, since the remaining number of times NK is "1 time" and the second hold number is "3", "3" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F and the second hold icon display area 70D. Suppose that three white icons are displayed.

Then, when the loss variation display (special variation effect) of the second special symbol in which the second reserved number is subtracted to "2" and the number of time reductions remains 0 is started, as shown in FIG. 49 (b). , The second hold number display area 70F is updated to "2", and the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "0". At this time, as a countdown effect, the "last" image is displayed and the "last" sound is output. Note that this countdown effect is the same as that executed during the normal time saving state, and is executed from the variable effect in which the remaining number of times in the special time saving state is "3 times".

When a predetermined time elapses from that time, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the icon TI of the icon display area 70C and the hold icon HI of the second hold icon display area 70D are hidden, and is it a big hit? A special operation effect that suggests whether or not it is executed is executed. Specifically, a dedicated background image for the special operation effect is displayed, and a promotion effect is executed in which the effect period of the effect button 17 is generated and the operation of the effect button 17 is urged. Specifically, a promotion image including a button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the valid period is displayed, and a voice of "press!" Is output.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state or the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), an effect suggesting that the effect is lost is executed. Specifically, the character image "Sorry ..." is displayed, and the sound effect "Push" is output. Then, the three effect symbols 70a on the left, middle, and right are temporarily stopped in the loss mode "481", and the icon TI of the icon display area 70C and the hold icon HI of the second hold icon display area 70D are redisplayed.

Then, when the variable time elapses and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 49 (e), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped in the lost mode (“481”), and the said The white icon redisplayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses and the normal game state is started, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), the effect mode T0, which is the effect mode dedicated to the time saving, is set and corresponds to the effect mode T0. Mode T0 Background image is displayed. Further, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 is audibly output.

Then, when the second reserved number is subtracted to "1" and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second reserved number display area 70F is updated to "1" as shown in FIG. 49 (g). At the same time, the shift display of the hold icon toward the icon display area 70C is started. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the left-handed notification for instructing the left-handed is executed. Specifically, a left-handed large image HUD suggesting left-handed is displayed, and the voice of "left-handed!" Is audibly output. It should be noted that the left-handed large image HUD and the sound of "left-handed!" Are common regardless of which gaming state the normal gaming state is shifted to.

Here, an example in which there is a hold memory (second hold number) at the start of the normal game state is shown, but if there is no hold memory and the customer is in the waiting state, the left-handed notification will not be executed, and a predetermined value. When the time elapses, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 is muted. If there is no hold memory (second hold number) at the start of the normal game state and the player is in the waiting state, the hold memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start port, and the variable effect is executed. Even if it is done, the left-handed notification is not executed during the fluctuation effect.

As described above, in the special time saving state, when the remaining number of times in the special time saving state reaches a predetermined number (here, 3 times), a countdown effect (emphasis effect) for emphasizing the remaining number of times of time saving is executed. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's feeling of frustration at the end of the special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the normal game state, the remaining number of times from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game) until the number of fluctuations displayed reaches the specified number (800 times) is predetermined. Even if it becomes a number (3 times in this case), even though the countdown effect (emphasis effect) is not executed, in the special time saving state, when the remaining number of times in the special time saving state reaches a predetermined number (3 times in this case), it remains. A countdown effect (emphasis effect) that emphasizes the number of time reductions is being executed. Therefore, while giving a surprise to the occurrence of the special time saving state, it is possible to arouse the player's frustration with the end of the special time saving state, and the contrasting effect effectively enhances the interest of the game. It is possible to improve.

Further, when the special time saving state (particularly the second special time saving state) ends, the result display for displaying the result of the game in the series of advantageous sections is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the factor that offends the player's mood that the result display is performed even though the jackpot game is not executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special time saving state (first special time saving state, second special time saving state) ends, the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the current setting value is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the factor that offends the player's mood that the set value cannot be good even though the jackpot game is not executed and the time is shortened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, when the special time saving state ends, the effect symbol 70a is changed from the second display mode (numerical image only) to the first display mode (numerical image SG, character image CG, symbol effect image ZE), while special. The symbol TZ does not change the display mode. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect, and to generate the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, at the start of the normal gaming state transitioned from the special time saving state, the effect mode T0, which is an effect mode dedicated to the time reduction, is set, and the background image corresponding to the effect mode T0 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know that the time saving state has ended, and to give a special feeling that the player has shifted to the production mode dedicated to the time saving, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the start of the normal game state that has transitioned from the special time saving state, if there is a hold memory, a left-handed large image HUD suggesting left-handed is displayed, and the voice of "left-handed!" Is audibly output. When the customer is waiting for a customer without a hold memory, the left-handed large image HUD suggesting left-handed is not displayed, and the voice of "left-handed!" Is not audibly output. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing unnecessary control.

Further, at the start of the normal game state transitioned from the special time saving state, even in the customer waiting state where there is no hold memory, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 dedicated to the time saving is audibly output, but it is predetermined. When the period elapses, it is muted (audible output is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the effect of the production is drastically reduced even in the waiting state where there is no hold memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the customer is waiting at the start of the normal game state after shifting from the special time saving state, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 may be muted without being audibly output. In this case, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T0 may be audibly output when the holding memory is generated by a new winning of the game ball at the start port from the customer waiting state and the variable effect is started. Alternatively, the left-handed large image HUD may be displayed and the sound of "left-handed!" May be output.

(Modification example when the second special time saving state occurs)
FIG. 50 is a modified example in which the variation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times in the normal game state and the second special time saving state occurs. It should be noted that the effect before and after the occurrence of the second special time saving state is different from the effect example when the second special time saving state occurs shown in FIG. 48.

First, as shown in FIG. 50A, the effect mode T1 is set according to the normal gaming state, and the mode T1 background image corresponding to the effect mode T1 is displayed. In addition, the lost effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (composed of the numerical image SG, the character image CG, and the symbol effect image ZE), and the lost special symbol TZ is displayed in a specific mode (numerical image +). It is assumed that it is displayed in small size). Further, since the first hold number is "3", "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E, and the white icon, the blue icon, and the red icon are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. There is. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is output at an audible volume.

Then, the first hold number is subtracted to "2", and the change of the special symbol becomes the specified number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (execution of RWM clear, 0 clear of the change number based on the end of the jackpot game). When the display (the loss variation display of the first special symbol) is started, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the first hold number display area 70E is updated to "2" and the hold icon is displayed. The shift display toward the area 70C is started, and further, the normal variation effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variation effect.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, and the time reduction suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of a special time reduction state is not executed, and the central effect is produced. The symbol 70a scrolls at a low speed.

Then, when the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the normal loss special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 50 (d), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed according to the normal loss result. The TZ is finally stopped, and the white icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Then, when the second special time saving state is started in a state where the stop time of the normal lost special symbol has elapsed and there is a hold memory, as shown in FIG. 50 (e), the effect mode T1 is maintained and the second special time reduction state is started. 2 The remaining number of times NK (here, 600 times), which is the number of times of variation display that can be executed in the special time saving state, is displayed. In addition, the first hold icon display area 70B (including the blue icon and the red icon) corresponding to the first hold on the non-priority side maintains the non-display state due to the time saving state, and becomes the second hold on the priority side. The corresponding second hold icon display area 70D is displayed.

Further, in a state where the BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is output at an audible volume, the right-handed notification for instructing the right-handed is executed. Specifically, while the right-handed small image MUS suggesting right-handedness is displayed, the right-handed large image MUD is not displayed and the audio output of "right-handed!" Is not executed. The right-handed small image MUS is a common one that does not depend on the gaming state when suggesting right-handed. In addition, unlike the normal execution of the time-saving rush effect, the jackpot game is not used, so the attention-calling effect for alerting the player is not performed.

Then, since the second hold number is "0" at the start of the second special time saving state, when the first hold number is subtracted to "1" and the loss variation display of the first special symbol is started, the figure is shown. As shown in 50 (f), the first reserved number display area 70E is updated to "1". The icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C without shifting the hold icon from the first hold icon display area 70B (what was a blue icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a white icon). Will be done.

Further, the variable effect is disclosed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "599 times". Even if the continuous advance notice effect is in the middle before the occurrence of the second special time reduction state, the continuous advance notice effect will end.

After that, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time elapses, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are finally stopped and redisplayed in the icon display area 70C. The white icon is erased. Then, if the second reserved number remains "0", the first reserved number is subtracted to "0" to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first reserved number display area 70E is "0". Will be updated to. Further, the hold icon is not shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C (the red icon in the first hold icon display area 70B is a white icon. Is displayed. Further, the variable effect is started, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display, and the remaining number of times NK is updated to "598 times".

On the other hand, if there is a second hold number at the start of the first special time saving state, the second hold number is subtracted without subtracting the first hold number, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Then, the second hold number display area 70F is updated by subtracting one, and the shift display of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area toward the icon display area 70C is started. Is started, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ start the variable display.

When the second special time saving state is started and there is no hold memory in the customer waiting state, the state of FIG. 50 (e) is maintained, and when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 50 (g). , The BGM corresponding to the effect mode T1 is muted. Furthermore, when the predetermined time elapses, the customer waiting demonstration production is started.

In this way, when the second special time saving state is generated, the time saving suggestion effect is not normally executed before the stop display of the lost result. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player when the second special time saving state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second special time saving state is generated, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a secret joy to the occurrence of the second special time saving state without excessively inciting the player's gambling spirit, and it is not possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second special time saving state is generated, the right-handed small image MUD is displayed instead of the right-handed large image MUD as the right-handed notification. It is possible to give a secret joy to the occurrence of the second special time saving state without excessively inciting the player's gambling spirit, and it does not improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the second special time saving state is generated, the effect mode T1 set in the normal game state is maintained. It is possible to give a secret joy to the occurrence of the second special time saving state without excessively inciting the player's gambling spirit, and it does not improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second special time saving state is generated, the time saving state is set without performing the warning effect (displaying the first warning image NB and displaying the second warning image CB) to call the player. Corresponding effects (display of the remaining number of times NK, right-handed notification, variable effects according to the time saving state, etc.) are performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player feels annoyed at the start of the second special time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the start condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied (the winning of the second start port 47 becomes easy) and the second special time saving state is generated, the first special is not prioritized over the second special symbol. When the look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect, etc.) corresponding to the symbol is executed, the execution of the look-ahead effect is terminated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the method of playing the game that is advantageous to the advantageous player can be determined from the look-ahead effect, and it is possible to secure the profit balance between the game store side and the player.

In the present embodiment, when the first special time saving state or the second special time saving state is generated, the first special time saving state or the second special time saving state is generated when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed. However, the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state may be generated from the start of the stop display of the special symbol. In this case, the special time saving rush effect may be executed before the stop display of the special symbol, or the special time saving rush effect may be executed from before the stop display of the special symbol to after the stop display. Further, the right-handed notification may be started from the start of the stop display of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the variation display of the special symbol which is the final round of the time saving state (normal time saving state, first special time saving state, second special time saving state), the stop time of the normal loss special symbol has elapsed. At that time, the normal game state was to be generated, but the normal game state may be generated from the start of the stop display of the normal loss special symbol. In this case, the left-handed notification may be started from the start of the stop display of the normal loss special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect modes (including the background and BGM) set in the normal time saving state, the first special time saving state, and the second special time saving state are common, but the time saving state (game of the main RAM 110c) is common. The production mode may be different for each type of the time reduction state flag stored in the RWM, or the production mode may be different between the normal time reduction state and the special time reduction state. Even in this case, right-handed notification (right-handed large image MUD, right-handed small image MUS, at least one of the voices of "right-handed!") And left-handed notification (left-handed large image) at the start of the time saving state. HUD, at least one of the "left-handed!" Voices) may be shared.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal time saving state, the first special time saving state, and the second special time saving state are generated, but the normal time saving state and the first special time saving state are generated, but the second special time saving state is generated. The state may not be generated, or the normal time saving state and the second special time saving state may be generated, but the first special time saving state may not be generated, or the normal time saving state may not be generated, but the first The special time saving state and the second special time saving state may be generated, or only one of the time saving states may be generated.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power supply is stopped after the second special time saving state is completed without executing the jackpot game, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored (setting change processing). (When the RWM clear process is not executed), the second special time saving state does not occur even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed the specified number of times (800 times) from the restart of the power supply. , A notification lamp (error lamp) is provided at a position visible to the game clerk, the player, or a visible position (for example, near the main information display 59 or the main information display 59) from the front side of the game machine, and the jackpot game is executed. When the power supply is stopped after the end of the second special time saving state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored (the start of the power supply is the normal game state and the second is in the main RAM 110c. If the information indicating that the special time saving state has already occurred is stored, that is, if the specification does not clear the number of fluctuations when the second special time saving state occurs, the number of fluctuations is 800 or more. 2 If the specification is such that the number of fluctuations is cleared when the special time reduction state occurs and the second special time reduction occurrence flag is memorized, the jackpot game is executed when the second special time reduction occurrence flag is memorized). By turning on or blinking the notification lamp by the game program until the time is up, the time reduction occurrence notification suggesting that the time reduction state has already occurred may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp from the outside that the second special time saving state has already occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if the second special time saving state does not occur when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times after the power supply is restarted, troubles between the game store and the player are less likely to occur.

In addition, even when the time saving occurrence notification indicating that the time saving state has already occurred is performed, the power is supplied after the normal time saving state or the first special time saving state is completed without executing the jackpot game. When the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored (indicating that the start time of the power supply is the normal game state and the second special time saving state has already occurred in the main RAM 110c. If the information is not stored, that is, if the specification does not clear the number of fluctuations when the second special time saving state occurs, if the number of fluctuations is less than 800, the number of fluctuations is calculated when the second special time saving state occurs. If the specification is to clear and store the second special time reduction occurrence flag, the time reduction occurrence notification may not be performed when the second special time reduction occurrence flag is not stored). In this way, the player's willingness to play is not discouraged, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even when the time saving occurrence notification indicating that the time saving state has already occurred is performed, the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state overlap each other, and the jackpot game is executed. When the second special time saving state ends without being performed, but the power supply is stopped when the first special time saving state continues, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored (power supply). When the start time is the first special time saving state and the main RAM 110c stores information indicating that the second special time saving state has already occurred), the time saving occurrence notification is not performed at that time. It may be. In this case, the time reduction occurrence notification may be performed when the first special time reduction state ends, or the time reduction occurrence notification may not be performed even when the first special time reduction state ends, and the power supply stops in that state. After that, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the time saving occurrence notification may be performed.

Further, even when the time saving occurrence notification indicating that the time saving state has already occurred is performed, the normal time saving state and the first special time saving state overlap each other, and the jackpot game is executed. When the normal time saving state ends without any problem, but the power supply stops when the first special time saving state continues, and then the power supply resumes and the control state of the game is restored (when the power supply starts). In the case of the first special time saving state and the main RAM 110c does not store information indicating that the second special time saving state has already occurred), the time saving occurrence notification may not be performed. In this case, even if the first special time saving state ends, the time saving occurrence notification is not performed, the power supply is stopped after the first special time saving state ends, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. However, it may be possible not to notify that the time has been shortened.

In addition, instead of turning on or blinking the notification lamp (error lamp) as a notification that the time reduction has occurred, a small character image such as "a time reduction state has occurred" or "a second special time reduction has occurred" is displayed on the main display device 70. May be displayed, or a voice such as "a time saving state has already occurred" or "a second special time saving has occurred" may be output from the voice output device 9.

Further, the time saving notification may be executed by using any one or more of the notification lamp (error lamp), the main display device 70, and the audio output device 9, or a plurality of notifications may be executed at the same time. Alternatively, a plurality of things may be executed in a predetermined order.

In addition, the time-saving notification using the notification lamp (error lamp) is not executed until the jackpot game is executed, that is, until the stop time of the jackpot special symbol has elapsed, but the jackpot special symbol is stopped. It may be executed until the time when the display is started.

Further, the time saving occurrence notification using the main display device 70 and the voice output device 9 may be executed until the special symbol confirmation command transmitted when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed is received. , The command may be executed until the opening designation command of the jackpot game is received.

Further, the time saving notification using at least one of the notification lamp (error lamp), the main display device 70, and the voice output device 9 is not executed until the jackpot game is executed, but is performed from the restart of the power supply. It may be executed and ended only for a predetermined period (for example, until one hour elapses or until a predetermined number of times (10 times, etc.) of variable display is executed).

Further, the time saving notification using the main display device 70 may not be performed during the customer waiting demo production, or may be performed even during the customer waiting demo production, which is important. It may be performed during low-level error notification (full error notification), but may not be performed during high-importance error notification (unrecoverable error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, etc.).

Further, regarding the time reduction occurrence notification using the voice output device 9, any ball is used when the game is performed from the customer waiting state (for example, when it is detected that the touch sensor 15a of the launch handle 15 is touched). It may be started when the game ball is detected by the detection switch).

Further, in the present embodiment, the launch permission designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, and the game ball can be launched. By transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game is in a game-enabled state.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the ball lending arranged in parallel with the game machine 1 Although it is possible to pay out a game ball based on a payout request from the machine (ball lending), a game ball based on a payout request from the ball lending machine after the progress control of the game is started and the game becomes playable. It may be possible to pay out (ball lending).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c) is not paid out when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Although the payout ball number data does not remain, the backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c). In this case, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on. If the unpaid payout ball number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 120c), the unpaid payout ball number data can be used even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out the based game ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the grant condition (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the large winning opening). The ball may be managed as data and the prize ball data may be added (added to the possession ball data).

Further, in the present embodiment, three types of time saving state flags, a normal time saving state flag, a first special time saving state flag, and a second special time saving state flag are provided, but only one type of time saving state flag is provided, and a normal game is performed. Set the time saving state flag when changing from the state to the time saving state (normal time saving state, 1st special time saving state, 2nd special time saving state), and clear the time saving state flag when changing from the time saving state to the normal gaming state. You may.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination is determined. A gaming machine that executes a gaming effect is common. Some of such gaming machines aggregate game information generated by the game and display the performance for evaluating the performance of the gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-023716). However, with such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that the performance display is not effective for the gaming store.

As the first gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, it is possible to aggregate the variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (variable display of the special symbol) and the game information (the number of payouts during normal times, the number of outs during normal times) generated by the game. It is possible to display the aggregation means, the calculation means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the game information aggregated by the aggregation means, and the specific information calculated by the calculation means on the display means. The game information is being aggregated, and the predetermined number of times (800 times) is reached from the establishment of the predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). When the lost symbol (normally lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, the aggregation of the game information is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to display the performance effectively for the game store.

As a second gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, it is possible to aggregate the variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (variable display of the special symbol) and the game information (the number of payouts during normal times, the number of outs during normal times) generated by the game. It is possible to display the aggregation means, the calculation means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the game information aggregated by the aggregation means, and the specific information calculated by the calculation means on the display means. The game information is being aggregated with possible information display means, and the predetermined number of times (800 times) has been reached since the predetermined condition was satisfied (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). When the lost symbol (normally lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, the aggregation of the game information is interrupted.
In the variable display of the symbol, which is the specified number of times (600 times) after the aggregation of the game information is interrupted, when the lost symbol (normally lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed, the game information is displayed. Aggregation is restarted. Therefore, it is possible to display the performance effectively for the game store.

As a third gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol), a normal game state (non-time saving state), and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The state control means that can be controlled to the state (time saving state), the totaling means that can total the game information (the number of payouts during normal times, the number of outs during normal times) generated by the game, and the totaling means are totaled. It is provided with a calculation means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the obtained game information, and an information display means capable of displaying the specific information calculated by the calculation means on the display means. , When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) for which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol executed during the aggregation of the game information, the aggregation of the game information is stopped. It has come to be characterized by that. Therefore, it is possible to display the performance effectively for the game store.

As a fourth gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol), a normal game state (non-time saving state), and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The state control means that can be controlled to the state (time saving state), the totaling means that can total the game information (the number of payouts during normal times, the number of outs during normal times) generated by the game, and the totaling means are totaled. It is provided with a calculation means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the obtained game information, and an information display means capable of displaying the specific information calculated by the calculation means on the display means. , When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol executed during the aggregation of the game information, the aggregation of the game information is interrupted. When the normal lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, which is the specified number of times (200 times) after the aggregation of the game information is interrupted, the said Aggregation of game information is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to display the performance effectively for the game store.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination is determined. A gaming machine that executes a gaming effect is common. Some of such gaming machines display an instruction indicating the launch position of the gaming medium at the start of the jackpot game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-075479). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the player becomes accustomed to the playability and the interest of the game is low.

As the first gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol) and an instruction display (right-handed display) for launching (right-handed) the game medium at a specific position in the game area. It is equipped with an instruction display executing means capable of executing (lighting of a vessel), and is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). In the variable display of the symbol, when the lost symbol (normally lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed, the instruction display is started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second gaming machine for solving the above problem, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, control of the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (variable display of the special symbol), the display means capable of displaying the effect image of the game, and the display means. In the variation display of the symbol, which is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined conditions (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game), the special game is provided. When the loss symbol (normal loss special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display means is instructed to launch the game medium at a specific position in the game area (right-handed large image, right-handed large image, right-handed). Right-handed small image) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol) and an instruction display (right-handed display) for launching (right-handed) the game medium at a specific position in the game area. When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) for which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, the instruction display executing means capable of executing (lighting of the vessel) is provided. The instruction display (lighting of the right-handed indicator) is started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, control of the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (variable display of the special symbol), the display means capable of displaying the effect image of the game, and the display means. When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) for which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the symbol, the display means is set to a specific position in the game area. A launch instruction image (right-handed large image, right-handed small image) instructing to launch (right-handed) the game medium is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination is determined. A gaming machine that executes a gaming effect is common. Some of such gaming machines output signals according to the gaming situation to the outside of the gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-023716). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the gaming situation cannot be sufficiently grasped outside the gaming machine.

As the first gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol) and a signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine. , And in the variation display of the symbol after the predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game), the specific symbol (big hit special symbol) on which the special game is executed is stopped and displayed. When this is done, the output of the predetermined signal is started, and the special game is not executed in the variable display of the symbol before the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (normal loss special symbol). When is stopped and displayed, the output of the predetermined signal is not started, and when the lost symbol (normally lost special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, which is the predetermined number of times since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined signal is stopped. The output of the signal is started. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a second gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the gaming medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine and a state controlling means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the shortened time is shortened. A variation of the special symbol, which is provided with a signal output means and is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game) in the normal game state. When the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed on the display, it is controlled to the specific game state, and during the variable display of the normal symbol at the predetermined time, the normal game state is changed to the above. When controlled to the specific gaming state, the output of the predetermined signal is started, the variation display of the normal symbol continues at the predetermined time, and the shortened time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a third gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a state control means (time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the gaming machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of times (800 clear) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). When the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, which is the second time, the game is controlled to the specific game state, and the above-mentioned is displayed during the variable display of the normal symbol. When controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, the output of the predetermined signal is started, the variation display of the normal symbol continues, and the auxiliary game is executed from the next variation display of the normal symbol. At that time, the opening of the special starting area is set to the extension time. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a fourth gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning of the gaming medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine and a state controlling means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the shortened time is shortened. A variation of the special symbol, which is provided with a signal output means and is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game) in the normal game state. In the display, when the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to the specific game state, and is controlled from the normal game state to the specific game state during the execution of the auxiliary game. If so, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the execution of the auxiliary game is continued, and the shortened time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a fifth gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a state control means (time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the gaming machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of times (800 clear) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). When the lost symbol from which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the special symbol, which is the second time, the auxiliary game is controlled to the specific game state and the special start area is opened in a predetermined time. When the normal game state is controlled to the specific game state during execution, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the special start area is opened in a predetermined time. The execution of the auxiliary game is continued, and the next The opening of the special starting area from the auxiliary game is the extension time. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a sixth game machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal game state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the game machine and a state control means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific game state (time reduction state) in which the time is shortened. A variation of the special symbol, which is provided with a signal output means and is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game) in the normal game state. When the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed on the display, the specific game state is controlled for a predetermined period, and the normal game is displayed during the variation display of the normal symbol at the predetermined time. When the state is controlled to the specific gaming state, the output of the predetermined signal is started, the variation display of the normal symbol continues at the predetermined time, and the shortened time is obtained from the next variation display of the normal symbol. When the specific gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state during the variation display of the normal symbol in the shortened time, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped and the variation display of the normal symbol in the shortened time is displayed. Is continued, and the predetermined time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a seventh gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning of the gaming medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a state control means (time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the gaming machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of times (800 clear) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). When the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, which is the second time, the game is controlled to the specific game state for a predetermined period, and the variable display of the normal symbol is performed. When the normal gaming state is controlled to the specific gaming state, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the variation display of the normal symbol continues, and the auxiliary game is released from the next variation display of the normal symbol. When the opening of the special starting area when executed is the extension time and the specific gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state during the variation display of the normal symbol, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped and the output of the predetermined signal is stopped. The variation display of the normal symbol continues, and the opening of the special starting area when the auxiliary game is executed from the next variation display of the normal symbol is set to the predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the eighth gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning of the gaming medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine and a state controlling means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the shortened time is shortened. A variation of the special symbol, which is provided with a signal output means and is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game) in the normal game state. When the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed on the display, it is controlled to the specific game state for a predetermined period, and the specific game state is changed from the normal game state to the specific game state during the execution of the auxiliary game. When controlled to, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the execution of the auxiliary game is continued, the shortened time is reached from the next variation display of the normal symbol, and the specific game state is executed during the execution of the auxiliary game. When the game is controlled to the normal game state, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped and the execution of the auxiliary game is continued, and the predetermined time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the ninth game machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the game machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and in the normal game state, a predetermined number of times (800 clear) from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game). When the lost symbol (normal lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol, which is the second time, the game is controlled to the specific game state for a predetermined period, and the special starting area is predetermined. When the control from the normal game state to the specific game state is controlled during the execution of the auxiliary game released in time, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the special start area is released in the predetermined time. The game continues, the opening of the special starting area from the next auxiliary game becomes the extended time, and the special starting area is opened in the extended time. During the execution of the auxiliary game, the specific game state is changed to the normal game state. When controlled to, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped and the special start area is opened for an extended time. The auxiliary game continues, and the special start area is released from the next auxiliary game for the predetermined time. It is supposed to be. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the tenth gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol) and a signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine. When a specific symbol (big hit special symbol) on which the special game is executed is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the symbol, the output of a predetermined signal is started, and the special game is displayed in the variation display of the symbol. When the normal loss symbol (normal loss special symbol) that is not executed is stopped and displayed, the output of the predetermined signal is not started, and the special game is not executed in the variation display of the symbol. Specific loss symbol (special loss special symbol) Is stopped and displayed, the output of a predetermined signal is started. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the eleventh gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine and a state controlling means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the shortened time is shortened. When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state, the signal output means is provided, and the specific game state is entered. When controlled and controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state during the variation display of the normal symbol at the predetermined time, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the normal symbol at the predetermined time is displayed. The variation display continues, and the shortened time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As a twelfth gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a state control means (time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the gaming machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state. When it is displayed, it is controlled to the specific gaming state, and when it is controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state during the variation display of the normal symbol at the predetermined time, the output of the predetermined signal is started. At the same time, the variation display of the normal symbol continues at the predetermined time, and the opening of the special starting area when the auxiliary game is executed from the next variation display of the normal symbol becomes the extension time. There is. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the thirteenth gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine and a state controlling means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the shortened time is shortened. When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state, the signal output means is provided, and the specific game state is entered. When controlled and controlled from the normal game state to the specific game state during the execution of the auxiliary game, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the execution of the auxiliary game is continued, and the next normal symbol The shortened time is set from the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the 14th gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the gaming medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a state control means (time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the gaming machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state. When displayed, when the special start area is controlled to the specific game state and the special start area is opened from the normal game state to the specific game state during the execution of the auxiliary game, the predetermined signal of the predetermined signal is displayed. As the output is started, the execution of the auxiliary game in which the special starting area is opened in a predetermined time continues, and the opening of the special starting area from the next auxiliary game becomes the extended time. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the fifteenth gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal game state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the game machine and a state control means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific game state (time reduction state) in which the time is shortened. When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) for which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state, the specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) is stopped and displayed. When controlled to the gaming state and controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state during the variation display of the normal symbol at the predetermined time, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the said at the predetermined time. When the variation display of the normal symbol continues, the shortened time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol, and the specific game state is controlled to the normal game state during the variation display of the normal symbol at the shortened time. As the output of the predetermined signal is stopped, the variation display of the normal symbol continues in the shortened time, and the predetermined time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the 16th gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the gaming medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a state control means (time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the gaming machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state. When it is displayed, it is controlled to the specific gaming state for a predetermined period, and when it is controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state during the variable display of the normal symbol, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the said The variation display of the normal symbol continues, and the opening of the special starting area when the auxiliary game is executed from the next variation display of the normal symbol becomes the extension time, and the specific game is displayed during the variation display of the normal symbol. When the state is controlled to the normal game state, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped, the variation display of the normal symbol continues, and the auxiliary game is executed from the next variation display of the normal symbol. The opening of the special starting region is set to the predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the 17th gaming machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium to the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) in which the variation display of the normal symbol is set for a predetermined time, and It is possible to output a predetermined signal (advantageous state signal) to the outside of the gaming machine and a state controlling means capable of controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the shortened time is shortened. When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) that is provided with a signal output means and the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state, the specific game is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period. When the state is controlled and the normal game state is controlled to the specific game state during the execution of the auxiliary game, the output of the predetermined signal is started and the execution of the auxiliary game is continued, and the next normal game is executed. When the time is shortened from the variation display of the symbol and the specific game state is controlled to the normal game state during the execution of the auxiliary game, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped and the execution of the auxiliary game is continued. , The predetermined time is set from the next variation display of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

As the eighteenth game machine for solving the above problems, a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed based on the winning of the game medium in the special starting area (first starting port, second starting port). A first determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute, and a special figure variation display execution means capable of executing a variation display of a special symbol based on the determination result of the first determination means. , The second determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game for opening the special start area based on the winning of the game medium in the normal start area (normal start area), and the second determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, the normal symbol variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal gaming state (non-game state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is a predetermined time. A state control means capable of controlling a time saving state) and a specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the opening of the special starting area during the auxiliary game is an extension time, and a predetermined signal (advantageous) to the outside of the game machine. A signal output means capable of outputting a state signal) is provided, and a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed in the variable display of the special symbol during the normal game state is stopped and displayed. Then, when the specific game state is controlled for a predetermined period and the special start area is opened in a predetermined time during the execution of the auxiliary game and the normal game state is controlled to the specific game state, the predetermined game state is determined. The execution of the auxiliary game in which the signal output is started and the special start area is opened in a predetermined time continues, and the opening of the special start area from the next auxiliary game becomes the extension time, and the special start area is opened. Is controlled from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state during the execution of the auxiliary game, the output of the predetermined signal is stopped and the special starting area is released in the extended time. The execution of the auxiliary game is continued, and the opening of the special starting area from the next auxiliary game is set to the predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to fully grasp the gaming situation outside the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination is determined. A gaming machine that executes a gaming effect is common. Some of such gaming machines display a background image on a display means for displaying the effect image, or output the effect sound from the sound output unit (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-075479). See publication). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is low.

As the first gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variation display executing means capable of executing a symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) and an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined notification (special time saving rush notification, right-handed notification). In the variation display of the symbol, which is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from the establishment of the predetermined condition (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game), the special game is not executed. When the normal loss special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, the variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the symbol (variation display of the special symbol), the normal game state (non-time saving state), and the variation of the variation display of the symbol than the normal game state. A state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (time reduction state) in which the time tends to be shortened and an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game are provided, and a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game state. In the variation display of the symbol, which is the predetermined number of times (800 times) from (RWM clear, 0 clear of the number of fluctuations due to the end of the jackpot game), the lost symbol (normal loss special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed. Then, when it is controlled to the specific gaming state and controlled from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state, a predetermined effect (right) even in the customer waiting state in which the next variation display of the symbol is not executed. The display of the small image MUS, the change of the background image, the change of the BGM, the change of the display mode of the effect symbol, etc.) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variation display executing means capable of executing a symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) and an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined notification (special time saving rush notification, right-handed notification). When a specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the symbol, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, the variation display executing means capable of executing the variation display of the symbol (variation display of the special symbol), the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), and the variation of the variation display of the symbol than the normal gaming state. A state control means capable of controlling a specific game state (time reduction state) in which the time tends to be shortened and an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game are provided, and a variation display of the symbol during the normal game state is provided. When the specific lost symbol (special lost special symbol) from which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed, the player is controlled to the specific game state, and when the normal game state is controlled to the specific game state, the following Even in the customer waiting state where the variable display of the symbol is not executed, a predetermined effect (display of right-handed small image MUS, change of background image, change of BGM, change of display mode of the effect symbol, etc.) is executed. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination is determined. There was a gaming machine that executes a gaming effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-075479). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is low.

As the first gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol), a normal game state (non-time saving state), and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A state control means that can be controlled to a state (second special time reduction state (ceiling time reduction)), a state storage means that can store information about a game control state (game RWM), and a power supply. Is started, the state recovery means capable of recovering the control state of the game based on the stored information of the state storage means, and the predetermined information according to the progress of the game (the number of fluctuations in which the second special time saving state has already occurred). Executes a predetermined notification (time reduction occurrence notification) based on the information storage means (game RWM) capable of storing (800 times or more), special time reduction occurrence flag, etc.) and the storage information of the information storage means. The state control means controls the specific gaming state for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the notification means controls when the control state of the game is restored. When the predetermined information is not stored in the information storage means, the predetermined information is stored in the information storage means when the control state of the game is restored without executing the predetermined notification. Is capable of executing the predetermined notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player and a determination result of the determination means are used. Based on this, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol (variable display of a special symbol), a state storage means capable of storing information regarding a control state of a game (RWM for a game), and A state recovery means capable of restoring the control state of the game based on the stored information of the state storage means when the power supply is started, and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification (time reduction occurrence notification). The state control means controls the first specific gaming state (normal time saving state, first special time saving state (symbol time saving)) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second condition is satisfied. The second specific gaming state (second special time saving state (ceiling time saving)) is controlled for a predetermined period based on the above, and the notification means supplies power after the first specific gaming state ends without executing the special game. When the power supply is started and the control state of the game is restored, the predetermined notification is not executed, but after the special game is not executed and the second specific game state is completed. When the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is started and the control state of the game is restored, the predetermined notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine (so-called loop probabilistic machine) that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, depending on the type of the jackpot special symbol. A gaming machine (so-called V probabilistic machine) that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state when the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided in the large winning opening, and shifts to a time-saving gaming state when the gaming ball does not pass through the specific area. ) May be used.

Further, it may be a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state after the end of all jackpot games, and shifts to a time-saving gaming state or a normal gaming state when a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are executed.

In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after all the jackpot games are completed and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is normally terminated. It may be a gaming machine (so-called fall lottery machine) that returns to the gaming state.

Further, in the small hit game, the first variable winning section 49 is opened, and the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 50 enters a specific area to start the big hit game (so-called two-kind gaming machine, 1 type + 2 type gaming machine) may be used.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable gaming machine) in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line by the game using the medal (game medium) (granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined amount is obtained. It can also be used for a rotating body type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a prize medal (prize medal data) to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine
5 game board
44 Fuzu Gate
45 1st starting port
47 2nd starting port
50 1st prize opening
56 Second prize opening
70 Main display device
71 Sub display device
110 Main control board
110a main CPU
120 payout control board
130 Production control board
130a sub CPU

Claims (1)

A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
A variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of a symbol based on the determination result of the determination means, and a variable display executing means.
A signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is provided.
When the specific symbol on which the special game is executed is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the symbol, the output of a predetermined signal is started.
When the normal lost symbol in which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the symbol, the output of the predetermined signal is not started and the output of the predetermined signal is not started.
A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific lost symbol from which the special game is not executed is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the symbol, the output of a predetermined signal is started.

Images